1 #LyX 2.3 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
31 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
33 % for customized page headers/footers
34 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
36 % change header rule width
37 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
39 % used to have extra space in table cells
40 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
41 {\usepackage{array}}{}
42 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
44 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
45 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
46 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
48 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
50 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
51 \use_default_options false
56 \maintain_unincluded_children false
58 \language_package default
61 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
62 \font_sans "lmss" "default"
63 \font_typewriter "lmtt" "default"
64 \font_math "auto" "auto"
65 \font_default_family default
66 \use_non_tex_fonts false
69 \font_sf_scale 100 100
70 \font_tt_scale 100 100
72 \use_dash_ligatures false
74 \default_output_format pdf2
76 \bibtex_command bibtex
77 \index_command default
81 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
82 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
86 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
87 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
88 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
93 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
94 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
97 \use_package amsmath 1
98 \use_package amssymb 1
101 \use_package mathdots 1
102 \use_package mathtools 1
103 \use_package mhchem 1
104 \use_package stackrel 1
105 \use_package stmaryrd 1
106 \use_package undertilde 1
108 \cite_engine_type default
112 \paperorientation portrait
117 \notefontcolor #0000ff
134 \paragraph_separation skip
137 \math_numbering_side default
138 \quotes_style english
142 \paperpagestyle default
143 \tracking_changes true
144 \output_changes false
148 \author -712698321 "Jürgen Spitzmüller"
159 by the \SpecialChar LyX
164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
166 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
167 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
168 Documentation mailing list:
169 \begin_inset CommandInset href
171 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
183 \begin_inset Newline newline
187 \begin_inset Newline newline
191 \begin_inset Note Note
194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
195 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
196 \begin_inset Newline newline
201 https://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/Manuals#UserGuide
209 \begin_layout Standard
210 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
211 LatexCommand tableofcontents
218 \begin_layout Chapter
222 \begin_layout Section
223 What is \SpecialChar LyX
227 \begin_layout Standard
229 is a document preparation system.
230 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
231 scripts, publishable books, business
232 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
233 It is unlike most other
234 \begin_inset Quotes eld
238 \begin_inset Quotes erd
241 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
243 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
244 \begin_inset Quotes eld
248 \begin_inset Quotes erd
252 \begin_inset Quotes eld
256 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
259 pt type, left justified, 5
260 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
264 \begin_inset Quotes erd
269 takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
273 \begin_layout Standard
274 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
279 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
283 \begin_layout Standard
288 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
289 's philosophy: most importantly,
290 the format of all of the manuals.
291 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
292 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
298 manual describes that, too.
301 \begin_layout Section
306 \begin_layout Standard
307 Like most applications, \SpecialChar LyX
308 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its
310 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
311 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
315 \begin_layout Standard
316 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
317 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
318 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
320 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
321 only a vertical scrollbar.
322 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
323 The first case is large images.
324 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
325 image and use the option
336 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
339 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
340 this doesn't work for equations yet.
343 \begin_layout Standard
344 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
345 menus and toolbar buttons, have a look at
351 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
353 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
360 \begin_layout Section
364 \begin_layout Standard
365 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
367 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
369 Just select the manual you want to read from the
376 \begin_layout Section
377 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
379 \begin_inset CommandInset label
381 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
388 \begin_layout Standard
389 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
390 can be configured via the menu
392 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
396 \begin_inset Index idx
399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
406 is able to inspect your system to see what programs, \SpecialChar LaTeX
408 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
409 packages are available.
410 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
412 Although this configuration has already been done when \SpecialChar LyX
414 your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
415 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
419 \begin_inset space \space{}
422 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
423 classes, and which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
425 To force \SpecialChar LyX
426 to re-inspect your system, you should use
428 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
432 \begin_inset Index idx
435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
436 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
442 You should then restart \SpecialChar LyX
443 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
446 \begin_layout Section
449 \begin_inset CommandInset label
451 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
458 \begin_layout Standard
459 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
460 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
461 installed, but you will not be
462 able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it installed.
463 However, some \SpecialChar LyX
464 documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
465 PDFs and the like, and every \SpecialChar LyX
466 document can always be output as plain text
470 \begin_layout Standard
471 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
472 or DocBook classes or packages.
473 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
474 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
477 \begin_layout Standard
478 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
479 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
480 has found on your system are listed in a file you can
483 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
491 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
492 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
495 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
499 \begin_inset Index idx
502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
503 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
511 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
518 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
522 \begin_layout Chapter
523 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
527 \begin_layout Section
528 Basic File Operations
529 \begin_inset Index idx
532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
541 \begin_layout Standard
546 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
547 in addition to some more advanced operations:
550 \begin_layout Itemize
572 \begin_layout Itemize
588 arg "buffer-new-template"
594 \begin_layout Itemize
616 \begin_layout Itemize
626 \begin_layout Itemize
640 \begin_layout Itemize
662 \begin_layout Itemize
674 arg "buffer-write-as"
680 \begin_layout Itemize
694 \begin_layout Itemize
708 \begin_layout Standard
709 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
710 a few minor differences.
713 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
724 command lists the available templates.
725 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
726 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
727 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
733 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
735 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
742 \begin_layout Standard
743 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
752 \begin_inset Quotes eld
756 \begin_inset Quotes erd
760 \begin_inset Quotes eld
764 \begin_inset Quotes erd
768 \begin_inset Quotes eld
772 \begin_inset Quotes erd
775 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
776 to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank space
777 is just that — a big, blank space.
785 \begin_layout Standard
806 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
811 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
814 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
832 will reload the document from disk.
833 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
834 and want to restore it to the last save.
843 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
844 them as your changes.
847 \begin_layout Section
848 Basic Editing Features
849 \begin_inset Index idx
852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
859 \begin_inset CommandInset label
861 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
868 \begin_layout Standard
869 Like most modern word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
870 can perform cut and paste operations
871 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
872 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
873 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
874 editing features and how to access
876 We will start with cut and paste.
879 \begin_layout Standard
880 As you might expect, the
884 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
885 various other editing features.
886 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
890 \begin_layout Itemize
896 \begin_inset Index idx
899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
928 \begin_layout Itemize
934 \begin_inset Index idx
937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
966 \begin_layout Itemize
972 \begin_inset Index idx
975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1000 \begin_layout Itemize
1004 \begin_inset space ~
1010 \begin_layout Itemize
1014 \begin_inset space ~
1020 \begin_layout Itemize
1024 \begin_inset space ~
1028 \begin_inset space ~
1034 \begin_inset Index idx
1037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1046 \begin_inset Index idx
1049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1064 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1074 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1080 \begin_layout Standard
1081 The first three are self-explanatory.
1082 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1083 and other programs by
1104 put text in two versions into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted),
1105 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1110 supports formatted and unformatted text as well, and additionally graphics.
1111 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1112 For example if the clipboard contains text in the format of comma separated
1113 values (CSV) and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1114 into individual cells.
1118 \begin_inset space ~
1123 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
1124 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1128 \begin_layout Standard
1132 \begin_inset space ~
1137 contains optional items for specific formats, depending on the clipboard
1139 These include HTML, \SpecialChar LaTeX
1141 \begin_inset space ~
1148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1154 , PDF, PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1155 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1156 in different formats, and you want to select one format explicitly.
1158 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1162 \begin_inset space \space{}
1165 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1166 text which is often meaningless.) The menu item
1169 \begin_inset space ~
1172 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1174 \begin_inset space ~
1178 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1182 \begin_inset space ~
1191 , with the only difference that it acts on text only.
1192 It will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
1194 A new paragraph is only started when there is a blank line in the text.
1198 \begin_inset space ~
1203 the text is inserted as paragraphs where the line breaks of the text will
1204 start a new paragraph.
1205 This is for example useful to copy contents of tables from webpages to
1206 a table in \SpecialChar LyX
1211 \begin_inset space ~
1214 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1216 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1220 \begin_inset space ~
1228 \begin_inset space ~
1231 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1234 paste from the primary selection.
1235 This is normally the currently selected text.
1238 \begin_layout Standard
1241 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1243 \begin_inset space ~
1247 \begin_inset space ~
1255 \begin_inset space ~
1259 \begin_inset space ~
1265 Once you have found a word or expression, \SpecialChar LyX
1271 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1274 \begin_inset space ~
1283 \begin_inset space ~
1288 button to skip the current word.
1292 \begin_inset space ~
1297 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1301 \begin_inset space ~
1306 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1308 If the toggle is set, searching for
1309 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1317 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1320 will not match the word
1321 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1329 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1335 Match whole words only
1337 option can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1338 to only find complete words, e.
1339 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1343 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1351 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1355 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1363 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1368 offers also an advanced
1371 \begin_inset space ~
1375 \begin_inset space ~
1380 feature that is described in section
1381 \begin_inset space ~
1385 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1387 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1394 \begin_layout Standard
1395 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1396 \begin_inset space \space{}
1400 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1404 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1408 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1410 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1415 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1422 \begin_layout Standard
1426 arg "inset-select-all"
1429 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1430 When the cursor is inside an inset
1433 arg "inset-select-all"
1436 selects the content of the inset.
1440 arg "inset-select-all"
1443 consecutively will increase the selection to the whole inset and then to
1448 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1451 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1455 \begin_layout Section
1457 \begin_inset Index idx
1460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1467 \begin_inset Index idx
1470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1477 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1479 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1486 \begin_layout Standard
1487 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1489 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1492 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1495 or the toolbar button
1501 to undo some mistake.
1502 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1504 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1507 or the toolbar button
1514 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1518 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1521 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1522 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1525 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1528 \begin_layout Standard
1529 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1531 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1535 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1538 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1539 This is a consequence of the 100
1540 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1543 step undo limit mentioned above.
1546 \begin_layout Standard
1555 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
1557 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1561 \begin_layout Section
1563 \begin_inset Index idx
1566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1575 \begin_layout Standard
1576 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1579 \begin_layout Enumerate
1584 \begin_layout Itemize
1589 once anywhere in the edit window.
1590 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1594 \begin_layout Enumerate
1599 \begin_layout Itemize
1606 marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1609 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1612 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
1613 's buffer (and the clipboard).
1616 \begin_layout Itemize
1617 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
1620 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1627 \begin_layout Enumerate
1628 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1632 \begin_layout Standard
1633 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1634 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1638 \begin_layout Section
1640 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1642 name "sec:Navigating"
1647 \begin_inset Index idx
1650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1659 \begin_layout Standard
1661 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1664 \begin_layout Itemize
1669 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1670 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1673 \begin_layout Itemize
1674 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1676 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
1678 \begin_inset space ~
1683 or by the toolbar button
1686 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1692 \begin_layout Itemize
1693 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1695 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1698 and use the same menu to return to them.
1699 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1702 \begin_layout Standard
1706 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1711 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1712 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
1714 \begin_inset space ~
1719 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1720 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1721 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1722 your last editing position.
1725 \begin_layout Standard
1730 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
1734 \begin_layout Subsection
1736 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1738 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
1743 \begin_inset Index idx
1746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1747 Navigating ! Outline
1753 \begin_inset Index idx
1756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1765 \begin_layout Standard
1766 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1767 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1768 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1770 \begin_inset space ~
1774 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1776 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1780 ), or notes, or citations (see section
1781 \begin_inset space ~
1785 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1787 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1792 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1796 \begin_layout Standard
1797 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1798 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1799 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1800 dialog and to modify the citation.
1803 \begin_layout Standard
1808 field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear in the outline.
1809 For example, if you are displaying the list of
1811 Labels and References
1813 and wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1815 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1819 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1822 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1825 \begin_layout Standard
1826 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1827 you further to control the display.
1832 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1833 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1839 option keeps it in the current view state.
1840 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1841 \begin_inset space ~
1844 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1845 \begin_inset space ~
1848 3, the subsections of sections
1849 \begin_inset space ~
1852 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1857 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1858 \begin_inset space ~
1862 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1864 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1868 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1872 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1875 \begin_layout Standard
1882 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1883 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1897 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1898 So, for example, you can move section
1899 \begin_inset space ~
1903 \begin_inset space ~
1906 2.4 or after section
1907 \begin_inset space ~
1912 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
1925 (or the corresponding key bindings
1933 ) you can change the level of sections.
1934 So you can for example make section
1935 \begin_inset space ~
1939 \begin_inset space ~
1943 \begin_inset space ~
1949 \begin_layout Standard
1950 By right-clicking on a section in the outliner you can select the whole
1951 section to copy, cut or delete it.
1954 \begin_layout Subsection
1955 Horizontal Scrolling
1956 \begin_inset Index idx
1959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1960 Navigating ! Horizontal Scrolling
1968 \begin_layout Standard
1970 does not have a horizontal scrollbar because the standard output page formats
1972 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1976 \begin_inset space \space{}
1980 \begin_inset space ~
1983 A4 are less wide than PC or laptop screens.
1984 Therefore you will get troubles in the output of your document if document
1985 parts exceed the width of the \SpecialChar LyX
1989 \begin_layout Standard
1990 There are of course exceptions where horizontal scrolling is necessary.
1994 \begin_layout Itemize
1996 is used on a small tablet computer
1999 \begin_layout Itemize
2000 Wide tables that are rotated 90° to fit a whole page
2004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2012 \begin_inset space ~
2025 \begin_layout Itemize
2026 Math constructs with long command names
2029 \begin_layout Standard
2030 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
2031 has an mechanism that scrolls automatically when the cursor
2033 As example shrink the \SpecialChar LyX
2034 windows so that table
2035 \begin_inset space ~
2039 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2041 reference "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2046 You will now see a dotted red line at the right or the left side of the
2048 Put the cursor into the table and move it with the Tab or the arrow keys
2049 to see the horizontal scrolling of the table.
2052 \begin_layout Standard
2053 \begin_inset Float table
2059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2060 \begin_inset Caption Standard
2062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2063 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2065 name "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2069 Horizontal scrolling test.
2077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2079 \begin_inset Tabular
2080 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="3">
2081 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
2082 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2083 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2084 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2086 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2095 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2104 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
2107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2126 \begin_layout Section
2127 Input/Word Completion
2128 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2130 name "sec:Input-Completion"
2135 \begin_inset Index idx
2138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2145 \begin_inset Index idx
2148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2179 \begin_layout Standard
2181 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2183 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2184 is used to propose completions.
2187 \begin_layout Standard
2188 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2191 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2196 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2203 \begin_inset space ~
2207 \begin_inset space ~
2212 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2216 \begin_inset space ~
2221 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2222 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2226 \begin_inset space ~
2232 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2233 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2234 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2235 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2238 \begin_layout Standard
2240 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
2241 completions available.
2246 key to accept a proposed completion.
2247 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2248 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
2249 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2256 \begin_layout Standard
2257 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2258 ing options for text.
2259 The special math option
2263 enables characters to be composed.
2264 If, for example, you want to insert the character
2265 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2268 , you can then input the characters
2269 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2277 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2280 to a formula to get it.
2281 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
2282 of the math toolbar.
2283 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
2287 that is in \SpecialChar LyX
2288 's installation folder.
2289 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2298 \begin_layout Section
2300 \begin_inset Index idx
2303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2310 \begin_inset Index idx
2313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2342 \begin_inset Index idx
2345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2376 \begin_layout Standard
2377 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2391 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
2394 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2398 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in section
2399 \begin_inset space ~
2403 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2405 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
2412 \begin_layout Standard
2416 \begin_inset space ~
2424 \begin_inset space ~
2445 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2449 \begin_layout Labeling
2450 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2454 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2455 LatexCommand nomenclature
2457 description "Tabulator key"
2464 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
2466 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2467 \begin_inset space ~
2471 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2473 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2478 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2480 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2484 , especially section
2485 \begin_inset space ~
2489 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2491 reference "subsec:Lists"
2497 If you are still confused, look in the
2502 \begin_inset Newline newline
2510 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2511 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2515 \begin_layout Labeling
2516 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2520 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2521 LatexCommand nomenclature
2523 description "Escape key"
2531 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2535 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2538 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2539 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2542 \begin_layout Labeling
2543 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2549 \begin_inset space ~
2553 \begin_inset space ~
2560 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2561 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2565 \begin_layout Standard
2566 There are three modifier keys:
2569 \begin_layout Labeling
2570 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2576 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2584 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2588 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2589 LatexCommand nomenclature
2591 description "Control key"
2596 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2597 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2601 \begin_layout Itemize
2610 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2613 \begin_layout Itemize
2622 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2625 \begin_layout Itemize
2634 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2638 \begin_layout Labeling
2639 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2645 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2653 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2657 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2658 LatexCommand nomenclature
2660 description "Shift key"
2665 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2666 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2669 \begin_layout Labeling
2670 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2676 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2684 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2688 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2689 LatexCommand nomenclature
2691 description "Alt or Meta key"
2696 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2697 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2698 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2704 \begin_inset Newline newline
2707 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2709 menu accelerator keys
2712 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2713 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2717 \begin_layout Standard
2718 For example, the sequence
2719 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2725 \begin_inset space ~
2729 \begin_inset space ~
2735 \begin_inset space ~
2743 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2747 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2751 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2756 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2762 \begin_inset space ~
2768 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2778 \begin_layout Standard
2783 manual lists all other things bound to the
2791 \begin_layout Standard
2792 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2794 , because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at
2795 the bottom of \SpecialChar LyX
2796 's main window which describes the name of the action you
2797 have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2798 The \SpecialChar LyX
2799 menus also list the defined key bindings.
2800 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2801 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2803 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2804 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2812 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2819 followed by a capital
2826 \begin_layout Chapter
2829 \begin_inset Index idx
2832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2842 \begin_layout Section
2844 \begin_inset Index idx
2847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2856 \begin_layout Subsection
2860 \begin_layout Standard
2861 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
2862 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
2863 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
2864 numbering schemes, and so on.
2865 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
2866 and format the title of your document differently.
2869 \begin_layout Standard
2874 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
2875 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
2876 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
2877 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
2878 picks one for you by default.
2879 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
2882 \begin_layout Subsection
2884 \begin_inset Index idx
2887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2894 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2896 name "sec:Document-Classes"
2903 \begin_layout Standard
2904 You can select a class using the
2906 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
2907 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
2911 \begin_inset Index idx
2914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2921 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
2925 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2929 \begin_layout Standard
2930 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
2935 \begin_layout Description
2936 Article for basic articles
2939 \begin_layout Description
2940 Report for basic reports
2943 \begin_layout Description
2944 Book for writing a book
2947 \begin_layout Description
2948 Letter for US-style letters
2951 \begin_layout Standard
2952 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
2953 only uses if you have installed
2954 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
2955 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
2956 distributions will include
2958 Here are some of the classes.
2959 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
2961 Special Document Classes
2970 \begin_layout Description
2971 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
2974 \begin_layout Description
2975 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
2979 \begin_layout Description
2980 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
2984 \begin_layout Description
2985 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
2986 Mathematical Society (AMS).
2987 There are three article layouts available.
2988 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
2989 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
2990 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
2991 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
2993 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2996 sequential numbering
2997 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3000 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
3001 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
3002 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
3003 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
3006 \begin_layout Description
3007 Beamer Layout for presentations
3010 \begin_layout Description
3011 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
3012 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3013 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3014 with \SpecialChar LyX
3018 \begin_layout Description
3019 Chess Layout to write about chess games
3022 \begin_layout Description
3024 \begin_inset space ~
3027 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
3030 \begin_layout Description
3031 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
3034 \begin_layout Description
3035 Foils Used to make transparencies
3038 \begin_layout Description
3039 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
3040 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3041 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3042 with \SpecialChar LyX
3046 \begin_layout Description
3047 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
3048 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
3051 \begin_layout Description
3052 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
3055 \begin_layout Description
3056 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
3059 \begin_layout Description
3060 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
3061 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
3062 (Is used by this document.)
3065 \begin_layout Description
3066 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
3069 \begin_layout Description
3070 Powerdot Layout for presentations
3073 \begin_layout Description
3078 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
3079 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
3081 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
3085 \begin_layout Description
3086 Slides Used to make transparencies
3089 \begin_layout Description
3091 \begin_inset space ~
3094 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
3095 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
3098 \begin_layout Description
3099 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
3102 \begin_layout Standard
3103 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
3105 You can find details about the non-standard classes in chapter
3107 Special Document Classes
3114 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
3115 of the document classes.
3118 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3122 \begin_layout Standard
3123 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
3125 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3126 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3128 \begin_inset Index idx
3131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3140 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3144 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3148 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
3149 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
3151 So it may seem that something is wrong.
3154 \begin_layout Standard
3157 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
3162 , are highly specialized.
3164 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
3165 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
3166 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
3167 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
3168 by some document class.
3169 There are just too many of them.
3170 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
3173 \begin_layout Standard
3174 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
3175 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3179 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3182 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3183 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
3184 document class for a new file.
3186 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3189 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3196 manual for information on how to install them.
3197 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3203 \begin_layout Standard
3204 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3205 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
3206 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3207 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3208 class files to be used for dissertation
3209 s submitted to those universities.
3210 The \SpecialChar LyX
3211 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3213 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3217 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3223 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3226 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3228 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3230 name "subsec:Modules"
3235 \begin_inset Index idx
3238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3247 \begin_layout Standard
3248 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3249 chosen document class.
3250 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3251 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3258 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3262 \begin_inset Index idx
3265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3272 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3276 \begin_layout Standard
3277 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3278 packages or file format converters that are not always
3279 installed by default.
3281 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3282 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3283 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3284 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3286 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3287 file without the missing prerequisites.
3288 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3289 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3292 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3296 \begin_inset Index idx
3299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3300 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
3306 See section Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3311 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3314 \begin_layout Standard
3315 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3323 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3325 will advise you about these things.
3333 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3335 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3337 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3342 \begin_inset Index idx
3345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3346 Document ! Local Layout
3354 \begin_layout Standard
3355 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3356 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3357 : They are intended to be used in
3358 a variety of different documents.
3359 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3360 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3361 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3362 need a specific inset or character style only that one time.
3363 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3365 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3367 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3371 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3383 manual for information on how to use it.
3386 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3390 \begin_layout Standard
3391 Each class has a default set of options.
3392 Here's a quick table describing them:
3395 \begin_layout Standard
3396 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3402 \begin_layout Standard
3404 \begin_inset Tabular
3405 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3406 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3407 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3408 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3409 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3410 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3411 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3413 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3422 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3440 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3458 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3476 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3496 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3513 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3531 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3549 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3567 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3587 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3604 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3622 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3640 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3658 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3678 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3695 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3713 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3731 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3749 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3769 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3786 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3804 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3822 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3840 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3865 \begin_layout Standard
3866 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3872 \begin_layout Standard
3873 You're probably also wondering what
3874 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3878 \begin_inset space ~
3882 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3886 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
3887 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
3892 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
3897 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
3907 headings, there are also
3915 headings, and so on.
3916 We will describe these headings fully in section
3917 \begin_inset space ~
3921 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3923 reference "subsec:Headings"
3930 \begin_layout Subsection
3932 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3934 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
3939 \begin_inset Index idx
3942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3949 \begin_inset Index idx
3952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3961 \begin_layout Standard
3962 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
3964 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3971 \begin_inset space ~
3979 \begin_inset space ~
3984 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
3986 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
3987 doesn't support special options you want to
3988 use for your document.
3989 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
3990 -class and its options, you have to read
3994 \begin_layout Standard
3998 \begin_inset space ~
4005 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4011 \begin_inset space ~
4016 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
4017 You can choose between the following five options:
4020 \begin_layout Labeling
4021 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4026 Use default page style of current class.
4029 \begin_layout Labeling
4030 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4035 No page numbers or headings.
4038 \begin_layout Labeling
4039 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4047 \begin_layout Labeling
4048 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4053 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
4054 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
4055 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
4056 maximum sectioning level of the class.
4059 \begin_layout Labeling
4060 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4065 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
4066 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4072 \begin_inset Index idx
4075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4083 How they are defined is explained in section
4084 \begin_inset space ~
4088 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4090 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
4097 \begin_layout Standard
4098 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
4099 \begin_inset space ~
4103 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4105 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4112 \begin_layout Subsection
4113 Paper Size and Orientation
4114 \begin_inset Index idx
4117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4118 Document ! Paper size
4124 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4126 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
4133 \begin_layout Standard
4134 You can find the following options in the menu
4137 \begin_inset space ~
4144 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4148 \begin_inset Index idx
4151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4160 \begin_layout Labeling
4161 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4165 \begin_inset space ~
4170 What size paper to print on.
4175 \begin_layout Itemize
4181 \begin_layout Itemize
4187 \begin_layout Itemize
4193 \begin_layout Itemize
4199 \begin_layout Itemize
4202 US letter, US legal, US executive
4205 \begin_layout Itemize
4211 \begin_layout Itemize
4218 \begin_layout Labeling
4219 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4224 To choose whether to output as
4235 \begin_layout Labeling
4236 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4240 \begin_inset space ~
4245 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4246 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4249 \begin_layout Subsection
4251 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4253 name "subsec:Margins"
4258 \begin_inset Index idx
4261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4268 \begin_inset Index idx
4271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4280 \begin_layout Standard
4281 Paper margins are set in the menu
4283 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4287 \begin_inset Index idx
4290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4299 \begin_layout Standard
4300 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4301 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4302 the paper format and the font size into account.
4305 \begin_layout Subsection
4309 \begin_layout Standard
4310 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4316 That includes the paragraph environments.
4317 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4318 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4319 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4321 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4322 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4326 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4330 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4332 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4333 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4334 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4337 \begin_layout Section
4338 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4339 \begin_inset Index idx
4342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4343 Paragraph ! Indentation
4351 \begin_layout Subsection
4353 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4355 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4362 \begin_layout Standard
4363 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4364 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4367 \begin_layout Standard
4368 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4369 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4370 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4371 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4375 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4381 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4382 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4383 language than English.
4385 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
4388 \begin_layout Standard
4389 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4390 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4391 into \SpecialChar LyX
4393 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4396 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4398 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
4399 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
4400 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
4405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4407 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
4408 goes to produce a printable file.
4413 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4415 gives you the ability globally to change
4419 these pre-coded spacings.
4420 We will explain more later.
4423 \begin_layout Subsection
4424 Paragraph Separation
4425 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4427 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4432 \begin_inset Index idx
4435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4436 Paragraph ! Separation
4444 \begin_layout Standard
4452 \begin_inset space ~
4460 \begin_inset space ~
4467 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4471 \begin_inset Index idx
4474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4480 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4483 \begin_layout Subsection
4487 \begin_layout Standard
4488 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4491 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4493 \begin_inset space ~
4498 dialog and toggle the
4501 \begin_inset space ~
4506 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4509 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4513 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4514 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4518 \begin_layout Standard
4519 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4520 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4523 \begin_layout Subsection
4525 \begin_inset Index idx
4528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4529 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4537 \begin_layout Standard
4540 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4544 \begin_inset Index idx
4547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4556 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4560 \begin_inset space ~
4569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4570 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4576 \begin_inset Index idx
4579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4586 installed to use this feature.
4591 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4593 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4595 \begin_inset space ~
4600 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4601 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4604 \begin_layout Section
4605 Paragraph Environments
4606 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4608 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4613 \begin_inset Index idx
4616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4617 Paragraph ! Environments
4623 \begin_inset Index idx
4626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4627 Paragraph environments|(
4635 \begin_layout Subsection
4639 \begin_layout Standard
4640 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4643 \begin_layout Standard
4652 } \SpecialChar ldots
4662 \begin_inset Newline newline
4665 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
4667 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
4668 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4669 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4678 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4681 \begin_layout Standard
4682 A paragraph environment is simply a
4683 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4687 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4690 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4691 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4692 scheme, labels, and so on.
4693 Additionally, you can
4694 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4698 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4701 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4702 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4703 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4704 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4706 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4708 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4711 \begin_layout Standard
4712 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4713 \begin_inset Graphics
4714 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4720 at the left end of the toolbar.
4722 will change the environment of the
4726 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4727 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4728 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4732 \begin_layout Standard
4741 create a new paragraph using the
4745 paragraph environment.
4747 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4751 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4754 because if you are in one of these environments:
4757 \begin_layout Itemize
4763 \begin_layout Itemize
4769 \begin_layout Itemize
4775 \begin_layout Itemize
4781 \begin_layout Itemize
4787 \begin_layout Itemize
4793 \begin_layout Itemize
4799 \begin_layout Standard
4801 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4805 , rather than resetting it to
4810 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4811 \begin_inset space ~
4815 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4817 reference "sec:Nesting"
4824 \begin_layout Subsection
4828 \begin_layout Standard
4829 The default paragraph environment is
4834 It creates a plain paragraph.
4836 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4837 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4838 this manual) are in the
4845 \begin_layout Standard
4846 You can nest a paragraph using the
4850 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
4858 \begin_layout Subsection
4860 \begin_inset Index idx
4863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4872 \begin_layout Standard
4873 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
4874 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
4876 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4880 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4883 for thanks or contact information.
4884 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4885 places all of this on a separate page
4886 along with today's date.
4887 For other types of documents, the title
4888 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4892 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4895 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
4899 \begin_layout Standard
4901 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
4915 Here's how you use them:
4918 \begin_layout Itemize
4919 Put the title of your document in the
4926 \begin_layout Itemize
4927 Put the author name in the
4934 \begin_layout Itemize
4935 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
4936 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
4942 Note that using this environment is optional.
4943 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4944 will automatically insert today's date.
4945 If you don't want a date, use the option
4947 Suppress default date on front page
4951 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4952 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
4954 \begin_inset space ~
4962 \begin_layout Standard
4963 You can use footnotes to insert
4964 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4968 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4971 or contact information.
4974 \begin_layout Subsection
4976 \begin_inset Index idx
4979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4986 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4988 name "subsec:Headings"
4995 \begin_layout Standard
4996 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
4998 takes care of the numbering for you.
5001 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5003 \begin_inset Index idx
5006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5007 Section headings ! Numbered
5015 \begin_layout Standard
5016 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
5020 \begin_layout Enumerate
5026 \begin_layout Enumerate
5032 \begin_layout Enumerate
5038 \begin_layout Enumerate
5044 \begin_layout Enumerate
5050 \begin_layout Enumerate
5056 \begin_layout Enumerate
5062 \begin_layout Standard
5064 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
5065 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
5066 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
5069 \begin_layout Standard
5070 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
5071 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
5072 You group the book into chapters.
5074 does a similar grouping:
5077 \begin_layout Itemize
5082 is divided into either
5093 \begin_layout Itemize
5105 \begin_layout Itemize
5117 \begin_layout Itemize
5129 \begin_layout Itemize
5141 \begin_layout Itemize
5153 \begin_layout Standard
5154 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
5157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5162 Not all document types use the
5166 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
5171 is the top-level heading.
5179 \begin_layout Standard
5184 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
5185 labels it with its number,
5186 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
5188 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
5190 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5194 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5200 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5202 \begin_inset Index idx
5205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5206 Section headings ! Unnumbered
5214 \begin_layout Standard
5215 The unnumbered section headings have a
5216 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5220 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5223 at the end of their name.
5224 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5225 the table of contents, see section
5226 \begin_inset space ~
5230 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5239 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5240 Changing the Numbering
5241 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5243 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5250 \begin_layout Standard
5251 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5252 in the Table of Contents.
5253 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5255 Just as certain classes start with
5269 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5279 This is something you can change.
5282 \begin_layout Standard
5285 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5289 \begin_inset Index idx
5292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5301 \begin_inset space ~
5305 \begin_inset space ~
5310 you will see two counters.
5315 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5316 numbers a section heading.
5317 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5321 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5322 Short Titles of Headings
5323 \begin_inset Index idx
5326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5327 Section headings ! Short titles
5333 \begin_inset Argument 1
5336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5343 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5345 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5352 \begin_layout Standard
5353 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5354 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5355 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5356 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5359 \begin_layout Standard
5361 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5362 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5363 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5364 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5367 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
5369 \begin_inset space ~
5375 This will insert a box labeled
5376 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5380 \begin_inset space ~
5384 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5387 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5388 This also works for captions inside floats.
5389 There can only be one short title per title.
5392 \begin_layout Standard
5393 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5396 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5400 \begin_layout Standard
5401 The following information applies to all section headings:
5404 \begin_layout Itemize
5405 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5408 \begin_layout Itemize
5409 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5412 \begin_layout Itemize
5413 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5416 \begin_layout Itemize
5417 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5420 \begin_layout Subsection
5424 \begin_layout Standard
5426 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5440 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5441 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5442 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5443 the text they contain.
5444 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5452 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5455 \begin_layout Standard
5456 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5465 when you start a new paragraph.
5466 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5470 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5471 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5472 have to change back to the
5476 environment yourself.
5479 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5481 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5488 \begin_inset Index idx
5491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5500 \begin_layout Standard
5501 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5502 time for the differences.
5511 are identical except for one difference:
5515 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5524 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5527 \begin_layout Standard
5528 Here's an example of the
5541 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5543 See – no indentation!
5547 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5548 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5549 the other paragraph.
5552 \begin_layout Standard
5553 Here's another example, this time in the
5560 \begin_layout Quotation
5566 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5567 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5568 the first line, then
5572 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5576 you were quoting other text.
5579 \begin_layout Quotation
5580 Here's a new paragraph.
5581 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5582 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5585 \begin_layout Standard
5586 As the examples show,
5590 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5591 They should put quotes in the
5596 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5600 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5603 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5605 \begin_inset Index idx
5608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5615 \begin_inset Index idx
5618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5625 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5634 \begin_layout Standard
5639 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5645 \begin_inset Newline newline
5648 Which I did not rehearse!
5652 It could be much worse.
5653 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5655 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5656 indented a bit more than the first.
5657 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5663 \begin_inset Newline newline
5666 And make things look fine
5667 \begin_inset Newline newline
5673 arg "newline-insert newline"
5679 \begin_layout Standard
5684 does not indent both margins.
5685 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5686 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
5689 arg "newline-insert newline"
5695 \begin_layout Subsection
5697 \begin_inset Index idx
5700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5707 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5716 \begin_layout Standard
5718 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5728 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5729 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5738 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5739 lets you provide your own label.
5740 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5741 describing some general features of all four of them.
5744 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5748 \begin_layout Standard
5749 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5751 First, \SpecialChar LyX
5752 treats each paragraph as a list item.
5761 reset the environment to
5765 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5766 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5767 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5771 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
5775 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5782 \begin_layout Standard
5783 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5784 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
5785 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
5787 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5788 you read all of section
5789 \begin_inset space ~
5793 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5795 reference "sec:Nesting"
5802 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5804 \begin_inset Index idx
5807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5814 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5823 \begin_layout Standard
5824 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5828 paragraph environment.
5829 It has the following properties:
5832 \begin_layout Itemize
5833 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5837 \begin_layout Itemize
5839 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5842 \begin_layout Itemize
5843 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5847 \begin_layout Itemize
5848 The items can have any length.
5850 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5851 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
5858 \begin_layout Itemize
5863 environment inside another
5867 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
5871 \begin_layout Itemize
5872 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
5875 \begin_layout Itemize
5877 always shows the same symbol on screen.
5880 \begin_layout Itemize
5882 \begin_inset space ~
5886 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5888 reference "sec:Nesting"
5892 for a full explanation of nesting.
5896 \begin_layout Standard
5897 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
5906 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
5909 \begin_layout Standard
5910 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
5911 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
5914 \begin_layout Itemize
5915 The label for the first level
5919 is a large black dot, or bullet.
5923 \begin_layout Itemize
5924 The label for the second level is a dash.
5928 \begin_layout Itemize
5929 The label for the third is an asterisk.
5933 \begin_layout Itemize
5934 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
5938 \begin_layout Itemize
5939 Back out to the third level.
5943 \begin_layout Itemize
5944 Back to the second level.
5948 \begin_layout Itemize
5949 Back to the outermost level.
5952 \begin_layout Standard
5953 These are the default labels for an
5958 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
5960 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5963 dialog in the submenu
5968 \begin_inset Index idx
5971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5977 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
5981 \begin_layout Standard
5982 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
5983 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
5985 \begin_inset space ~
5989 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5991 reference "sec:Nesting"
5998 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6000 \begin_inset Index idx
6003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6010 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6012 name "sec:Enumerate"
6019 \begin_layout Standard
6024 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
6025 It has these properties:
6028 \begin_layout Enumerate
6029 Each item has a numeral as its label.
6033 \begin_layout Enumerate
6034 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
6038 \begin_layout Enumerate
6040 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
6043 \begin_layout Enumerate
6048 environment resets the counter to one.
6051 \begin_layout Enumerate
6064 \begin_layout Enumerate
6065 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
6066 Items can have any length.
6069 \begin_layout Enumerate
6070 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
6073 \begin_layout Enumerate
6074 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
6077 \begin_layout Enumerate
6078 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
6082 \begin_layout Standard
6091 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
6093 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
6094 labels the four different levels in an
6101 \begin_layout Enumerate
6102 The first level of an
6106 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
6110 \begin_layout Enumerate
6111 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
6115 \begin_layout Enumerate
6116 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
6120 \begin_layout Enumerate
6121 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
6124 \begin_layout Enumerate
6125 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
6130 \begin_layout Enumerate
6131 Back to the third level
6135 \begin_layout Enumerate
6136 Back to the second level.
6140 \begin_layout Enumerate
6141 Back to the outermost level.
6144 \begin_layout Standard
6145 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
6149 environment, see section
6150 \begin_inset space ~
6154 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6156 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6161 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
6165 \begin_layout Standard
6166 There is more to nesting
6170 environments than we've stated here.
6171 You should read section
6172 \begin_inset space ~
6176 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6178 reference "sec:Nesting"
6182 to learn more about nesting.
6185 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6187 \begin_inset Index idx
6190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6199 \begin_layout Standard
6200 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6204 list has no fixed label.
6205 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6207 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6211 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6214 of the first line as the label.
6218 \begin_layout Description
6219 Example: This is an example of the
6226 \begin_layout Standard
6228 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6232 \begin_layout Standard
6234 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6238 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6241 it is meant that the first usage of the
6245 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6247 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6255 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6260 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6261 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6263 \begin_inset space ~
6269 \begin_inset space ~
6273 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6275 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6279 for more information.) Here is an example:
6282 \begin_layout Description
6284 \begin_inset space ~
6287 Example: This one shows how to use a
6290 \begin_inset space ~
6302 \begin_layout Description
6303 Usage: You should use the
6307 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6308 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6310 It's not a good idea to use a
6314 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6315 You're better off using
6327 paragraphs into them.
6330 \begin_layout Description
6331 Nesting: You can nest
6335 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6339 \begin_layout Standard
6340 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6341 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6342 them from the first line.
6345 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6347 \begin_inset Index idx
6350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6359 \begin_layout Standard
6364 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
6365 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
6369 \begin_layout Standard
6378 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6380 Here are its properties:
6383 \begin_layout Labeling
6384 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6386 \begin_inset space ~
6389 labels \SpecialChar LyX
6391 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6395 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6398 of each line as the item label.
6403 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6404 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6405 space as described above.
6408 \begin_layout Labeling
6409 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6410 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
6411 uses different margins for the item label and the
6412 body of the item text.
6413 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6414 label width plus a little extra space.
6418 \begin_layout Labeling
6419 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6421 \begin_inset space ~
6424 width \SpecialChar LyX
6425 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
6426 If the label width is larger, the label
6427 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6431 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6434 into the first line.
6435 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6436 margin of the rest of the item text.
6439 \begin_layout Labeling
6440 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6442 \begin_inset space ~
6445 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6450 environment has the same left margin.
6451 \begin_inset Newline newline
6454 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6457 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
6459 \begin_inset space ~
6464 dialog (toolbar button
6467 arg "layout-paragraph"
6474 \begin_inset space ~
6479 determines the default label width.
6480 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6482 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6486 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6489 multiple times instead.
6490 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6493 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6497 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6500 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6503 \begin_inset space ~
6508 every time you alter a label in a
6513 \begin_inset Newline newline
6516 The predefined default width is the length of
6517 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6521 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6525 \begin_inset space ~
6531 \begin_layout Standard
6536 list the same way as the
6540 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6546 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6550 \begin_layout Standard
6555 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6556 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6558 \begin_inset space ~
6562 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6564 reference "sec:Nesting"
6568 to learn about nesting.
6571 \begin_layout Standard
6572 There is yet another feature of the
6576 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
6577 left-justifies the item labels by
6579 You can use additional
6583 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
6584 justifies the item label.
6589 are documented in section
6590 \begin_inset space ~
6594 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6596 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
6601 Here are some examples:
6604 \begin_layout Labeling
6605 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6606 Left The default for
6613 \begin_layout Labeling
6614 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6615 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6622 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6625 \begin_layout Labeling
6626 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6627 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6631 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6638 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6641 \begin_layout Subsection
6643 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6645 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6650 \begin_inset Index idx
6653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6662 \begin_layout Standard
6663 The features described in this section require that the module
6665 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6667 is loaded in the document settings.
6668 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
6674 \begin_inset Index idx
6677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6687 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6688 Custom Enumerate Lists
6689 \begin_inset Index idx
6692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6693 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6701 \begin_layout Standard
6703 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6706 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6709 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6710 There you add the command
6713 \begin_layout Standard
6721 \begin_layout Standard
6733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6734 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
6735 Code, look at section
6736 \begin_inset space ~
6740 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6742 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6755 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6762 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6763 For capital Roman numerals replace
6775 in the command above.
6776 For Arabic numerals use
6784 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6788 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6791 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6806 \begin_layout Standard
6808 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6816 You can only number 26
6817 \begin_inset space ~
6820 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6828 \begin_layout Standard
6829 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6830 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6833 \begin_layout Standard
6834 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6837 \begin_layout Enumerate
6838 \begin_inset Argument 1
6841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6867 \begin_layout Enumerate
6868 \begin_inset Argument 1
6871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6894 \begin_layout Enumerate
6899 \begin_layout Enumerate
6900 \begin_inset Argument 1
6903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6927 \begin_layout Enumerate
6928 \begin_inset Argument 1
6931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6957 \begin_layout Standard
6958 For this list these commands were used:
6961 \begin_layout Standard
6972 \begin_inset Newline newline
6980 \begin_inset Newline newline
6988 \begin_inset Newline newline
6998 \begin_layout Standard
7005 makes the label emphasized and
7014 \begin_layout Standard
7015 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7023 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
7024 lists until you change the definition.
7032 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7034 \begin_inset Index idx
7037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7038 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
7046 \begin_layout Standard
7047 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
7050 \begin_layout Enumerate
7051 \begin_inset Argument 1
7054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7073 \begin_inset Note Note
7076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7077 goes back to default numbering
7085 \begin_layout Enumerate
7089 \begin_layout Standard
7093 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
7097 \begin_layout Standard
7098 To resume an enumeration, use the style
7103 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
7104 to indicate that it is a resumed
7105 list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
7106 , but in the output.
7109 \begin_layout Standard
7110 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7118 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
7127 \begin_layout Standard
7128 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
7130 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
7131 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
7132 of a normal enumeration.
7133 There, insert the command
7136 \begin_layout Standard
7142 \begin_layout Standard
7147 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
7151 \begin_layout Enumerate
7155 \begin_layout Enumerate
7159 \begin_layout Standard
7160 Enumeration starting at a given value:
7163 \begin_layout Enumerate
7164 \begin_inset Argument 1
7167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7183 This enumeration starts at 4
7186 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7188 \begin_inset Index idx
7191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7200 \begin_layout Standard
7201 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7203 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7206 \begin_layout Itemize
7210 \begin_layout Itemize
7211 with standard spacing
7214 \begin_layout Standard
7215 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7217 Add there the command
7221 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7224 \begin_layout Itemize
7225 \begin_inset Argument 1
7228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7247 \begin_layout Itemize
7251 \begin_layout Itemize
7255 \begin_layout Standard
7256 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7263 \begin_inset Index idx
7266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7274 For more information see its documentation,
7275 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7285 \begin_layout Standard
7286 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7288 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7289 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7290 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7293 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7296 \begin_layout Enumerate
7297 \begin_inset Argument 1
7300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7308 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7321 \begin_layout Enumerate
7322 with negative indentation
7325 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7326 Further Customization
7327 \begin_inset Index idx
7330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7331 Lists ! Customization
7339 \begin_layout Standard
7340 You can also change the style of description lists.
7344 \begin_layout Standard
7350 \begin_layout Standard
7351 changes the description label font, the command
7354 \begin_layout Standard
7360 \begin_layout Standard
7361 sets the list style.
7364 \begin_layout Standard
7365 An example where the command
7368 \begin_layout Standard
7373 itshape, style=nextline
7376 \begin_layout Standard
7380 \begin_layout Description
7382 \begin_inset space ~
7386 \begin_inset Argument 1
7389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7395 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7397 itshape, style=nextline
7407 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7408 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7412 \begin_layout Description
7414 \begin_inset space ~
7417 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7418 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7419 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7422 \begin_layout Standard
7423 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7429 \begin_inset Index idx
7432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7440 For more information see its documentation
7441 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7451 \begin_layout Subsection
7453 \begin_inset Index idx
7456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7465 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7467 \begin_inset space ~
7470 Address: An Overview
7473 \begin_layout Standard
7474 Although \SpecialChar LyX
7475 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7483 \begin_inset space ~
7489 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7490 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
7491 gags on the document.
7492 In contrast, you can use the
7499 \begin_inset space ~
7504 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7505 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7509 \begin_layout Standard
7510 Of course, you're not limited to using
7517 \begin_inset space ~
7526 \begin_inset space ~
7531 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7532 some European academic papers.
7535 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7537 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7539 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7546 \begin_layout Standard
7551 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7552 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7556 \begin_inset space ~
7561 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7562 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7563 Here's an example of each:
7566 \begin_layout Right Address
7568 \begin_inset Newline newline
7572 \begin_inset Newline newline
7576 \begin_inset Newline newline
7579 When is it? What is today?
7582 \begin_layout Standard
7586 \begin_inset space ~
7592 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
7594 the largest block of text on a single line.
7595 Here's an example of the
7602 \begin_layout Address
7604 \begin_inset Newline newline
7607 Where do I send this
7608 \begin_inset Newline newline
7611 Your post office and country
7614 \begin_layout Standard
7615 As you can see, both
7622 \begin_inset space ~
7627 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7632 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
7633 resets the nesting depth and sets the
7639 This makes sense, since
7647 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7648 Thus, you have to use
7655 arg "newline-insert newline"
7660 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7661 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
7663 \begin_inset space ~
7667 \begin_inset space ~
7672 ) to start a new line in an
7679 \begin_inset space ~
7687 \begin_layout Subsection
7691 \begin_layout Standard
7692 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7693 or list of references.
7695 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7698 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7700 \begin_inset Index idx
7703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7712 \begin_layout Standard
7717 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7718 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7719 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7720 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7734 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7735 The book document classes ignores the
7739 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7743 in a letter document class.
7746 \begin_layout Standard
7751 environment does several things for you.
7752 First, it puts the centered label
7753 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7757 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7761 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7763 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7764 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7765 the subsequent text.
7766 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
7768 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7772 \begin_layout Standard
7773 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7777 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7778 The new paragraph will still be in the
7783 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7784 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7787 \begin_layout Standard
7788 \begin_inset Float figure
7793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7795 \begin_inset Graphics
7796 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7804 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7807 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7809 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7830 \begin_layout Standard
7831 We would love to demonstrate the
7835 environment, but since this document is in the
7836 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7840 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7843 class, we can't do this.
7844 We inserted it therefore as figure
7845 \begin_inset space ~
7849 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7851 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7856 If you have never heard of an
7857 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7861 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7864 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
7867 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7869 \begin_inset Index idx
7872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7879 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7881 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
7888 \begin_layout Standard
7893 environment is used to list references.
7894 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7895 only use it at the end of the document.
7907 \begin_layout Standard
7908 When you first open a
7912 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
7913 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
7914 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7918 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7922 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7926 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7929 depending on the document class.
7930 The heading is in a large boldface font.
7931 Each paragraph of the
7935 environment is a bibliography entry.
7940 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7941 Each new paragraph is still in the
7948 \begin_layout Standard
7949 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
7950 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
7952 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
7954 handling, have a look at section
7955 \begin_inset space ~
7959 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7961 reference "sec:Bibliography"
7968 \begin_layout Subsection
7969 Special Environments
7972 \begin_layout Standard
7974 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
7975 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
7978 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7983 \begin_inset Index idx
7986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7994 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7996 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
8003 \begin_layout Standard
8009 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
8011 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
8016 key as a fixed whitespace.
8020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8033 \begin_inset space ~
8038 instead of an end-of-word marker.
8056 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
8059 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
8062 arg "newline-insert newline"
8079 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8080 So, when you finish using the
8085 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
8086 Also, you can nest the
8091 environment inside of others.
8094 \begin_layout Standard
8095 There are a few quirks with this environment:
8098 \begin_layout Itemize
8102 arg "newline-insert newline"
8105 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
8106 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8110 \begin_inset space \space{}
8120 arg "newline-insert newline"
8126 \begin_layout Itemize
8130 arg "newline-insert newline"
8140 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
8146 \begin_layout Itemize
8147 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
8148 You must put at least one
8152 in any line you want blank.
8153 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
8157 \begin_layout Itemize
8158 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
8162 since that will insert
8167 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8170 arg "self-insert \""
8176 \begin_layout Standard
8180 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8184 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8188 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8192 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8196 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8197 printf("Hello World!
8202 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8206 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8210 \begin_layout Standard
8211 This is just the standard
8212 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8216 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8223 \begin_layout Standard
8229 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
8231 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8232 as if you used a typewriter.
8233 \begin_inset Index idx
8236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8237 Paragraph environments|)
8242 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8245 Program Code Listings
8250 \begin_inset space ~
8258 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8262 \begin_inset Index idx
8265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8274 \begin_layout Standard
8279 environment is similar to the
8284 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8285 computer console text.
8290 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8304 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8305 you can have empty lines.
8318 \begin_layout Itemize
8319 have a certain language and a text style
8322 \begin_layout Itemize
8323 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8324 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8325 and \SpecialChar TeX
8329 \begin_layout Standard
8330 Because of these properties
8334 works like a typewriter.
8338 \begin_layout Verbatim
8342 \begin_layout Verbatim
8345 The following 2 lines are empty:
8348 \begin_layout Verbatim
8352 \begin_layout Verbatim
8356 \begin_layout Verbatim
8357 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8362 \begin_layout Standard
8367 environment is identical to
8371 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
8372 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
8379 \begin_layout Verbatim*
8383 \begin_layout Section
8384 Nesting Environments
8385 \begin_inset Index idx
8388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8389 Nesting ! Environments
8395 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8404 \begin_layout Subsection
8408 \begin_layout Standard
8410 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
8412 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8414 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8416 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8418 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8422 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8428 \begin_layout Enumerate
8432 \begin_layout Enumerate
8437 \begin_layout Enumerate
8441 \begin_layout Enumerate
8446 \begin_layout Enumerate
8450 \begin_layout Standard
8451 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8452 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8454 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
8456 \begin_inset space ~
8460 \begin_inset space ~
8468 \begin_inset space ~
8472 \begin_inset space ~
8477 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8479 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8482 arg "depth-increment"
8488 arg "depth-decrement"
8502 arg "depth-increment"
8508 arg "depth-decrement"
8512 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8513 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8517 \begin_layout Standard
8518 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
8519 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8520 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8521 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8522 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8525 \begin_layout Standard
8526 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8528 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
8530 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8533 \begin_layout Subsection
8534 What You Can and Can't Nest
8537 \begin_layout Standard
8538 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8539 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8542 \begin_layout Standard
8543 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8544 than a simple yes or no.
8545 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8548 \begin_layout Itemize
8549 Completely unnestable
8552 \begin_layout Itemize
8553 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8557 \begin_layout Itemize
8558 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8562 \begin_layout Standard
8563 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8564 environments have them:
8567 \begin_layout Description
8568 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8569 Can't nest into them.
8573 \begin_layout Itemize
8579 \begin_layout Itemize
8585 \begin_layout Itemize
8591 \begin_layout Itemize
8597 \begin_layout Itemize
8604 \begin_layout Description
8606 \begin_inset space ~
8609 Nestable You can nest them.
8610 You can nest other things into them.
8614 \begin_layout Itemize
8620 \begin_layout Itemize
8626 \begin_layout Itemize
8632 \begin_layout Itemize
8638 \begin_layout Itemize
8644 \begin_layout Itemize
8650 \begin_layout Itemize
8656 \begin_layout Itemize
8663 \begin_layout Itemize
8669 \begin_layout Itemize
8676 \begin_layout Description
8677 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8678 You can't nest anything into them.
8682 \begin_layout Itemize
8688 \begin_layout Itemize
8694 \begin_layout Itemize
8700 \begin_layout Itemize
8706 \begin_layout Itemize
8712 \begin_layout Itemize
8718 \begin_layout Itemize
8724 \begin_layout Itemize
8730 \begin_layout Itemize
8736 \begin_layout Itemize
8742 \begin_layout Itemize
8748 \begin_layout Itemize
8754 \begin_layout Itemize
8760 \begin_layout Itemize
8764 \begin_inset space ~
8770 \begin_layout Itemize
8777 \begin_layout Standard
8778 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8786 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8796 \begin_inset space ~
8799 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8800 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8801 nested section headings violate this.
8809 \begin_layout Subsection
8810 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8811 \begin_inset Index idx
8814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8815 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8823 \begin_layout Standard
8824 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8825 affected by nesting anyhow.
8829 \begin_layout Itemize
8833 \begin_layout Itemize
8837 \begin_layout Itemize
8841 \begin_layout Standard
8843 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8851 Figures and tables in
8855 are not affected by this.
8860 Have a look at section
8861 \begin_inset space ~
8865 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8867 reference "sec:Floats"
8871 for more information about
8878 \begin_layout Standard
8880 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
8881 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
8885 \begin_layout Standard
8886 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
8887 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8891 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8894 of its own, it behaves just like a
8895 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8899 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8902 paragraph environment.
8903 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
8907 \begin_layout Standard
8908 Here's an example with a table:
8911 \begin_layout Enumerate
8916 \begin_layout Enumerate
8917 This is (a) and it's nested.
8921 \begin_layout Standard
8922 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8928 \begin_layout Standard
8930 \begin_inset Tabular
8931 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8932 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
8933 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8934 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8936 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8954 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8974 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8992 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9018 \begin_layout Standard
9019 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9026 \begin_layout Enumerate
9028 The table is actually nested inside (a).
9032 \begin_layout Enumerate
9036 \begin_layout Standard
9037 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
9040 \begin_layout Enumerate
9045 \begin_layout Enumerate
9046 This is (a) and it's nested.
9050 \begin_layout Standard
9051 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9057 \begin_layout Standard
9059 \begin_inset Tabular
9060 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9061 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9062 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9063 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9065 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9083 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9103 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9121 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9147 \begin_layout Standard
9148 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9154 \begin_layout Enumerate
9161 In fact, it's not nested at all.
9164 \begin_layout Enumerate
9168 \begin_layout Standard
9169 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
9173 \begin_layout Standard
9174 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
9177 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
9180 \begin_layout Enumerate
9185 \begin_layout Enumerate
9186 This is (a) and it's nested.
9189 \begin_layout Standard
9190 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9196 \begin_layout Standard
9198 \begin_inset Tabular
9199 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9200 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9201 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9202 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9204 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9222 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9242 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9260 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9287 \begin_layout Standard
9288 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9294 \begin_layout Enumerate
9296 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9303 \begin_layout Enumerate
9307 \begin_layout Standard
9308 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9314 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9315 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9319 \begin_layout Subsection
9320 Usage and General Features
9323 \begin_layout Standard
9324 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9325 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9327 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9331 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9334 is the innermost possible depth.
9335 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9338 \begin_layout Enumerate
9339 level #1 – outermost
9343 \begin_layout Enumerate
9348 \begin_layout Enumerate
9353 \begin_layout Enumerate
9358 \begin_layout Itemize
9363 \begin_layout Itemize
9372 \begin_layout Standard
9373 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9374 both of them in the example.
9375 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9385 For example, if we tried to nest another
9390 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9394 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9397 , we would get errors.
9400 \begin_layout Subsection
9402 \begin_inset Index idx
9405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9414 \begin_layout Standard
9415 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9416 We have several examples of nested environments.
9417 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9421 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9422 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9425 \begin_layout Labeling
9426 \labelwidthstring MMM
9427 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9436 \begin_layout Labeling
9437 \labelwidthstring MMM
9438 #2-a This is level #2.
9439 We created it by using
9442 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9448 arg "depth-increment"
9455 \begin_layout Labeling
9456 \labelwidthstring MMM
9457 #3-a This is level #3.
9458 This time, we just enter
9465 arg "depth-increment"
9469 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9473 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9479 arg "depth-increment"
9486 \begin_layout Standard
9491 environment, nested inside of
9492 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9496 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9500 So, it's at level #4.
9501 We did this by entering
9504 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9510 arg "depth-increment"
9513 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9518 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9534 \begin_layout Standard
9539 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9542 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9548 \begin_layout Labeling
9549 \labelwidthstring MMM
9550 #4-a This is level #4.
9554 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9557 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9562 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9566 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9571 keep nesting things inside
9572 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9576 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9583 \begin_layout Labeling
9584 \labelwidthstring MMM
9585 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
9590 \begin_layout Labeling
9591 \labelwidthstring MMM
9592 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
9593 and this is level #6.
9594 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9598 \begin_layout Labeling
9599 \labelwidthstring MMM
9600 #5-b Back to level #5.
9604 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9610 arg "depth-decrement"
9617 \begin_layout Labeling
9618 \labelwidthstring MMM
9622 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9628 arg "depth-decrement"
9631 , we're back at level #4.
9635 \begin_layout Labeling
9636 \labelwidthstring MMM
9637 #3-b Back to level #3.
9638 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9642 \begin_layout Labeling
9643 \labelwidthstring MMM
9644 #2-b Back to level #2.
9649 \begin_layout Labeling
9650 \labelwidthstring MMM
9651 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9652 After this sentence, we will enter
9656 and change the paragraph environment back to
9663 \begin_layout Standard
9664 We could have also used the
9680 environment in place of the
9685 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9688 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9689 Example 2: Inheritance
9692 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9693 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9696 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9705 arg "depth-increment"
9709 \begin_inset Newline newline
9712 which, we will change to the
9720 \begin_layout Enumerate
9725 environment, at level #2.
9728 \begin_layout Enumerate
9729 Notice how the nested
9733 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9737 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9741 \begin_layout Standard
9742 We ended this example by entering
9747 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9751 and reset the nesting depth by using
9754 arg "depth-decrement"
9760 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9761 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9770 \begin_inset Argument 1
9773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9774 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9782 \begin_layout Enumerate
9783 This is level #1, in an
9787 paragraph environment.
9788 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9792 \begin_layout Enumerate
9797 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9803 arg "depth-increment"
9807 Now, what happens if we nest an
9811 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9812 label be? An asterisk?
9816 \begin_layout Itemize
9826 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9827 So, its label is a bullet.
9828 (We got here by using
9831 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9837 arg "depth-increment"
9840 , then changing the environment to
9848 \begin_layout Itemize
9849 Here's level #4, produced using
9852 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9858 arg "depth-increment"
9862 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
9867 \begin_layout Enumerate
9870 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
9875 Notice the type of numbering, it is
9879 , because we are in the
9887 environment (that is, it is an
9902 \begin_layout Enumerate
9907 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
9908 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
9912 \begin_layout Enumerate
9913 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
9916 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9919 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
9922 \begin_layout Enumerate
9926 arg "depth-decrement"
9929 to decrease the depth after the next
9932 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9939 \begin_layout Enumerate
9941 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
9946 \begin_layout Enumerate
9948 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9949 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
9953 \begin_layout Enumerate
9954 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
9963 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
9968 reset the counter for the label.
9972 \begin_layout Enumerate
9976 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9982 arg "depth-decrement"
9985 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
9986 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
9987 into the twofold-nested
9995 \begin_layout Enumerate
9996 The same thing happens if we do another
9999 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10005 arg "depth-decrement"
10008 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
10011 \begin_layout Standard
10012 Lastly, we reset the environment to
10017 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
10028 The number of other
10032 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
10039 The same rule applies for the
10043 environment, as well.
10046 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10047 Example 4: Going Bonkers
10050 \begin_layout Enumerate
10051 We're going to go totally nuts now.
10052 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
10053 the same detail with how we did it.
10062 \begin_layout Standard
10070 arg "depth-increment"
10077 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
10078 the example in parentheses someplace.
10079 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
10080 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
10081 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
10085 \begin_layout Enumerate
10090 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
10094 \begin_layout Verse
10095 Now we will add verse.
10096 \begin_inset Newline newline
10099 It will get much worse.
10100 \begin_inset Newline newline
10110 arg "depth-increment"
10120 \begin_layout Verse
10121 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
10122 \begin_inset Newline newline
10125 Bippitey boppitey boo!
10126 \begin_inset Newline newline
10132 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10140 \begin_layout Verse
10141 Here comes a table:
10145 \begin_layout Standard
10146 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10152 \begin_layout Standard
10154 \begin_inset Tabular
10155 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10156 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10157 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10158 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10160 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
10163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10178 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10198 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10216 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10243 \begin_layout Verse
10247 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10257 arg "depth-increment"
10263 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10269 \begin_inset Newline newline
10277 arg "depth-decrement"
10284 \begin_layout Enumerate
10289 : level #1) This is another item.
10290 Note that selecting a
10294 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10295 3 times to put the table inside the
10303 \begin_layout Quotation
10304 We're now ending the
10308 list and changing to
10313 We're still at level #1.
10314 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
10315 The next set of paragraphs is a
10316 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10320 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10323 We will nest both the
10330 \begin_inset space ~
10335 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10339 for the letter body.
10343 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10346 to preserve the depth.
10347 Remember that you need to use
10350 arg "newline-insert newline"
10353 to create multiple lines inside the
10360 \begin_inset space ~
10370 \begin_layout Right Address
10372 \begin_inset Newline newline
10375 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10376 \begin_inset Newline newline
10382 \begin_layout Address
10384 \begin_inset space ~
10390 \begin_layout Quotation
10391 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10392 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10395 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10396 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10397 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10398 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10399 as soon as possible.
10400 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10403 \begin_layout Quotation
10404 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10405 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10406 with your order, along with payment.
10409 \begin_layout Quotation
10410 We thank you again for your patience.
10413 \begin_layout Address
10415 \begin_inset Newline newline
10422 \begin_layout Quotation
10423 That ends that example!
10426 \begin_layout Standard
10427 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
10428 gives you a lot of power with just
10430 We could have easily nested an
10451 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10454 \begin_layout Subsection
10456 \begin_inset Index idx
10459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10460 Nesting ! Separation
10466 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10468 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
10475 \begin_layout Standard
10476 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
10478 For example you need two different enumerations:
10481 \begin_layout Enumerate
10486 \begin_layout Enumerate
10491 \begin_layout Enumerate
10495 \begin_layout Standard
10496 \begin_inset Separator plain
10502 \begin_layout Itemize
10508 \begin_layout Standard
10509 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10515 \begin_layout Enumerate
10519 \begin_layout Enumerate
10523 \begin_layout Enumerate
10527 \begin_layout Standard
10528 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
10529 list item and use the menu
10530 \change_deleted -712698321 1514652028
10534 \change_inserted -712698321 1514652029
10537 \SpecialChar menuseparator
10539 \change_deleted -712698321 1514652035
10540 Start New Environment
10541 \change_inserted -712698321 1514652814
10542 Separated <Name> Above
10546 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10547 Separated <Name> Below
10552 This inserts a plain separator (red line in \SpecialChar LyX
10554 \change_inserted -712698321 1514652169
10557 behind it the new list.
10559 \change_deleted -712698321 1514652256
10562 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
10563 Start New Parent Environment
10565 only appears if the item is nested.
10566 It does not only separate the list but also creates a new one outside the
10568 \change_inserted -712698321 1514652300
10569 Inside nested environments, it is also possible to split the outer environment
10574 \begin_layout Standard
10575 By right-clicking on a separator one can change it into a paragraph separator
10576 (red arrow in LyX).
10577 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator
10578 only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
10581 \begin_layout Standard
10582 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
10585 arg "paragraph-break"
10592 environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
10595 \begin_layout Section
10596 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10597 \begin_inset Index idx
10600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10609 \begin_layout Standard
10610 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10611 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
10613 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10614 be broken at the end of a line.
10615 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10619 \begin_layout Subsection
10621 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10623 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
10628 \begin_inset Index idx
10631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10640 \begin_layout Standard
10641 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
10642 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
10643 ) not to break the line at
10645 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
10648 \begin_layout Quote
10649 Further documentation is given in section
10650 \begin_inset Newline newline
10654 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10656 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10664 \begin_layout Standard
10665 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10666 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10670 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10674 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10678 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10680 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10685 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10689 A protected space is set with
10691 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10692 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10694 \begin_inset space ~
10702 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10708 \begin_layout Subsection
10710 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10712 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
10717 \begin_inset Index idx
10720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10721 Spacing ! Horizontal
10729 \begin_layout Standard
10730 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10732 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10733 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10737 The length units are listed in Appendix
10738 \begin_inset space ~
10742 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10744 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
10751 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10753 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10755 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
10760 \begin_inset Index idx
10763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10764 Spaces ! Inter-word
10772 \begin_layout Standard
10773 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
10774 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
10775 at the ends of sentences.
10776 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
10777 automatically takes care about this.
10778 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
10779 followed by a period; see section
10780 \begin_inset space ~
10784 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10786 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
10791 To insert a normal space, select
10793 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10794 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10796 \begin_inset space ~
10804 arg "space-insert normal"
10810 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10812 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10814 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
10819 \begin_inset Index idx
10822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10831 \begin_layout Standard
10833 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10837 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10840 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10841 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10845 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10849 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10850 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10851 inside abbreviations:
10854 \begin_layout Quote
10856 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10860 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10863 \begin_layout Standard
10864 or between values and units.
10865 Compare for example this:
10866 \begin_inset Newline newline
10870 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10874 \begin_inset Newline newline
10877 10 kg (normal space
10880 \begin_layout Standard
10881 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
10883 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10884 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10886 \begin_inset space ~
10894 arg "space-insert thin"
10900 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10904 \begin_layout Standard
10905 You can also insert the following space types:
10908 \begin_layout Description
10910 \begin_inset space ~
10914 \begin_inset space ~
10917 space A line with a
10918 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10922 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
10926 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10929 negative thin space between the arrows.
10932 \begin_layout Description
10934 \begin_inset space ~
10938 \begin_inset space ~
10941 space A line with a
10942 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10946 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
10950 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10953 negative medium space between the arrows.
10956 \begin_layout Description
10958 \begin_inset space ~
10962 \begin_inset space ~
10965 space A line with a
10966 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10970 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
10974 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10977 negative thick space between the arrows.
10980 \begin_layout Description
10982 \begin_inset space ~
10986 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10990 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10994 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
10998 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11002 \begin_inset space ~
11006 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11009 em) space between the arrows.
11012 \begin_layout Description
11014 \begin_inset space ~
11018 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11022 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11026 \begin_inset space \quad{}
11030 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11034 \begin_inset space ~
11038 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11041 em) space between the arrows.
11044 \begin_layout Description
11046 \begin_inset space ~
11050 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11054 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11058 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
11062 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11066 \begin_inset space ~
11070 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11073 em) space between the arrows.
11076 \begin_layout Description
11078 \begin_inset space ~
11082 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11086 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
11091 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11095 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11098 cm space between the arrows.
11101 \begin_layout Standard
11103 \begin_inset space ~
11107 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11109 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
11113 lists the different space sizes.
11116 \begin_layout Standard
11117 \begin_inset Float table
11122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11123 \begin_inset Caption Standard
11125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11126 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11128 name "tab:Width-of-the"
11132 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
11140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11142 \begin_inset Tabular
11143 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
11144 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
11145 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11146 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11148 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11159 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11172 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11181 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11186 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11196 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11205 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11210 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11220 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11229 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11234 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11244 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11253 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11258 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11262 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
11266 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11276 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11285 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11290 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11300 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11309 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11314 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11324 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11329 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11337 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11342 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11352 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11357 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11365 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11370 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11380 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11385 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11393 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11398 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11419 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11421 \begin_inset Index idx
11424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11433 \begin_layout Standard
11434 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
11435 feature for adding extra space
11436 in a uniform fashion.
11437 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11438 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11439 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11440 equally between themselves.
11443 \begin_layout Standard
11444 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
11447 \begin_layout Quote
11449 This is on the left side
11450 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11453 This is on the right
11456 \begin_layout Quote
11459 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11463 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11469 \begin_layout Quote
11472 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11476 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11480 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11486 \begin_layout Standard
11487 That was an example in the
11493 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11497 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11501 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11504 is one in a standard paragraph.
11505 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
11509 sitting in-between the two arrows.
11512 \begin_layout Standard
11513 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
11516 \begin_inset space ~
11521 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
11524 \begin_layout Standard
11526 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
11530 \begin_inset space ~
11536 \begin_layout Standard
11538 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
11542 \begin_inset space ~
11548 \begin_layout Standard
11550 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
11554 \begin_inset space ~
11560 \begin_layout Standard
11562 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
11566 \begin_inset space ~
11572 \begin_layout Standard
11574 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
11578 \begin_inset space ~
11584 \begin_layout Standard
11586 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
11590 \begin_inset space ~
11596 \begin_layout Standard
11597 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11605 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
11609 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
11611 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
11612 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
11616 option in the space dialog.
11624 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11626 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11628 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
11633 \begin_inset Index idx
11636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11645 \begin_layout Standard
11646 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
11647 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
11650 \begin_layout Standard
11651 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11654 What is correct English?:
11655 \begin_inset Newline newline
11659 \begin_inset Newline newline
11663 \begin_inset space ~
11666 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11667 \begin_inset Newline newline
11671 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11682 \begin_inset Newline newline
11686 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11697 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11703 \begin_layout Standard
11705 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
11706 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11710 \begin_inset space ~
11714 \begin_inset space ~
11718 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11722 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
11724 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11725 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11729 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
11731 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11735 \begin_inset space ~
11739 \begin_inset space ~
11743 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11746 into the phantom inset (note the space after
11747 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11751 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11755 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
11756 That is why it is named
11757 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11761 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11765 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
11766 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
11770 \begin_layout Subsection
11772 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11774 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
11779 \begin_inset Index idx
11782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11791 \begin_layout Standard
11792 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
11794 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11795 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11797 \begin_inset space ~
11803 There you find the following sizes:
11806 \begin_layout Standard
11819 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
11820 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
11825 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
11827 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
11828 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
11830 \begin_inset space ~
11836 \begin_inset Index idx
11839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11840 Document ! Settings
11845 for the paragraph separation.
11846 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
11857 \begin_layout Standard
11863 \begin_inset Index idx
11866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11872 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
11873 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
11878 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
11879 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
11888 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
11892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11897 s are described in section
11898 \begin_inset space ~
11902 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11904 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
11913 If there are several
11917 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
11918 You can therefore use
11922 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
11925 \begin_layout Standard
11930 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
11931 \begin_inset space ~
11935 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11937 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11944 \begin_layout Standard
11945 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11955 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
11956 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
11968 \begin_layout Subsection
11969 Paragraph Alignment
11970 \begin_inset Index idx
11973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11974 Paragraph ! Alignment
11982 \begin_layout Standard
11983 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
11985 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
11988 dialog (toolbar button
11991 arg "layout-paragraph"
11995 There are five possibilities:
11998 \begin_layout Itemize
12006 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
12012 \begin_layout Itemize
12020 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
12026 \begin_layout Itemize
12034 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
12040 \begin_layout Itemize
12048 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
12054 \begin_layout Itemize
12062 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
12068 \begin_layout Standard
12069 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
12070 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
12071 the left and right margins.
12072 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
12075 \begin_layout Standard
12077 This paragraph is right aligned,
12080 \begin_layout Standard
12082 this one is centered,
12085 \begin_layout Standard
12087 this one is left aligned.
12090 \begin_layout Subsection
12092 \begin_inset Index idx
12095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12096 Page breaks ! Forced
12102 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12104 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
12111 \begin_layout Standard
12112 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
12113 does the page breaks in your document, you can
12114 force a page break where you want one.
12115 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
12116 is good at page breaking.
12117 Only if you use a lot of
12121 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
12122 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
12125 \begin_layout Standard
12126 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
12127 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
12131 have to change the page breaking.
12134 \begin_layout Standard
12135 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
12137 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
12139 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12140 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12142 \begin_inset space ~
12148 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
12150 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12151 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12153 \begin_inset space ~
12158 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
12160 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
12161 on which only the last few lines are absent.
12164 \begin_layout Standard
12165 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
12166 at the top of a page.
12167 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
12169 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
12170 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
12171 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
12173 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12175 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
12179 to learn more about
12186 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12188 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12190 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
12195 \begin_inset Index idx
12198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12199 Page breaks ! Clear
12207 \begin_layout Standard
12208 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
12209 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
12210 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
12211 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
12212 it, if necessary by adding pages.
12215 \begin_layout Standard
12216 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
12218 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12219 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12221 \begin_inset space ~
12227 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
12229 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12230 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12232 \begin_inset space ~
12236 \begin_inset space ~
12241 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
12242 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
12245 \begin_layout Subsection
12247 \begin_inset Index idx
12250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12257 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12259 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
12266 \begin_layout Standard
12267 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
12269 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
12271 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12272 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12274 \begin_inset space ~
12278 \begin_inset space ~
12286 arg "newline-insert newline"
12290 Another type that is inserted via the menu
12292 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12293 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12295 \begin_inset space ~
12299 \begin_inset space ~
12307 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
12310 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
12312 This is useful to avoid
12313 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12317 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12320 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
12323 \begin_layout Standard
12324 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
12325 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
12327 very good at line breaking.
12328 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessary to set
12329 a line break actively, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
12330 \begin_inset space ~
12334 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12336 reference "sec:Quote"
12341 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12343 reference "sec:Verse"
12348 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12350 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
12357 \begin_layout Subsection
12359 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12361 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
12366 \begin_inset Index idx
12369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12378 \begin_layout Standard
12380 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12391 \begin_layout Standard
12395 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12396 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12398 \begin_inset space ~
12403 you can insert horizontal lines.
12404 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
12405 of the current text line or the paragraph.
12406 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
12409 \begin_layout Standard
12411 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12422 \begin_layout Section
12423 Characters and Symbols
12426 \begin_layout Standard
12427 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
12428 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
12429 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
12431 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12435 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12437 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
12441 for information on how this is done.
12444 \begin_layout Standard
12445 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
12450 dialog via the menu
12452 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12453 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
12459 \begin_layout Standard
12460 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12468 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
12469 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
12471 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
12479 \begin_layout Section
12480 Fonts and Text Styles
12481 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12483 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
12490 \begin_layout Subsection
12492 \begin_inset Index idx
12495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12504 \begin_layout Standard
12505 There are two types of fonts:
12508 \begin_layout Description
12510 \begin_inset space ~
12514 \begin_inset Index idx
12517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12523 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
12524 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12528 characters) in the font.
12529 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
12530 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
12531 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
12532 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
12533 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
12534 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
12535 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
12536 \begin_inset Newline newline
12539 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
12540 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
12541 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
12542 sizes than at small ones.
12543 \begin_inset Newline newline
12557 \begin_inset space ~
12565 \begin_layout Description
12567 \begin_inset space ~
12571 \begin_inset Index idx
12574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12580 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
12581 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
12582 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
12583 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
12584 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
12585 image manipulation program.
12586 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
12587 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
12588 \begin_inset space ~
12591 pixels high up to 34
12592 \begin_inset space ~
12595 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
12596 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
12597 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
12599 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
12600 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
12601 \begin_inset Newline newline
12604 Bitmap fonts are named
12607 \begin_inset space ~
12612 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
12615 \begin_layout Standard
12616 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
12617 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
12618 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
12619 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
12620 use scalable fonts.
12623 \begin_layout Standard
12624 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
12627 \begin_layout Standard
12628 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
12629 specifying character styles rather than specifying a particular font.
12630 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
12631 font to emphasize text, you use an
12632 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12636 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12640 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
12642 In \SpecialChar LyX
12643 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
12647 \begin_layout Subsection
12650 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12652 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12659 \begin_layout Standard
12660 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
12661 used its own fonts.
12662 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
12663 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12666 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12667 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
12668 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
12669 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
12670 to a word processor.
12671 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
12672 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12673 files are very portable across
12674 different machines.
12675 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
12676 has increased a lot
12677 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
12680 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
12682 \begin_inset space ~
12686 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12688 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
12693 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
12694 code in the document
12695 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
12698 \begin_layout Standard
12699 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
12700 engines that are also able directly
12701 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12703 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12705 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
12707 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
12708 that is installed on your system.
12709 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
12712 \begin_layout Standard
12713 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12721 In practice, some fonts might fail due to a legacy (non Unicode) font encoding,
12722 bad metrics, or other font deficiencies; so you might have to experiment.
12730 \begin_layout Subsection
12731 Document Font and Font size
12732 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12734 name "subsec:Document-Font"
12739 \begin_inset Index idx
12742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12749 \begin_inset Index idx
12752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12761 \begin_layout Standard
12762 You can set the document fonts in the
12764 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12768 \begin_inset Index idx
12771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12772 Document ! Settings
12782 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
12783 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
12786 \begin_inset space ~
12795 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
12797 \begin_inset space ~
12800 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
12803 \begin_layout Standard
12808 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
12809 This requires that you use
12821 as the output format, i.
12822 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12826 \begin_inset space \space{}
12829 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12830 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12831 installed (see section
12832 \begin_inset space ~
12836 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12838 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12843 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
12845 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
12846 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
12848 \begin_inset space ~
12851 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
12852 cannot determine the family.
12853 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
12854 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
12857 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
12860 \begin_layout Standard
12861 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
12862 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
12867 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12873 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
12874 With LyX's default font encoding, this is a look-alike of the standard
12877 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12883 \begin_inset space ~
12889 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12897 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12905 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12909 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12914 European Computer Modern
12917 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12925 However, some classes set different default fonts.
12928 \begin_layout Standard
12933 is a bitmap font, it looks pixelated in PDF output, especially when you
12934 read the PDF in a zoomed size.
12938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12939 This problem is less severe if you read PDFs in
12942 \begin_inset space ~
12947 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
12953 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
12954 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
12957 \begin_layout Itemize
12961 \begin_inset space ~
12966 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
12979 \begin_inset space ~
12984 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
12985 community in order to replace
12989 as the default font.
12990 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
12991 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
12994 \begin_inset space ~
13007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13008 One difference is improved kerning.
13016 \begin_layout Itemize
13017 If you do not like the look of
13025 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
13026 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13030 \begin_inset space ~
13036 \begin_inset space ~
13046 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
13047 \begin_inset space ~
13050 serif and typewriter fonts,
13054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13055 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
13056 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13062 \begin_inset space ~
13071 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
13072 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13076 \begin_inset space \space{}
13084 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13088 \begin_inset space \space{}
13094 \begin_inset space ~
13102 \begin_inset space ~
13112 but you can also select your own.
13113 \begin_inset Newline newline
13116 The differences between roman,
13119 \begin_inset space ~
13128 fonts are explained in section
13129 \begin_inset space ~
13133 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13135 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13140 \begin_inset Newline newline
13146 \begin_inset space ~
13151 was originally designed for newspapers.
13152 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
13153 into the small newspaper columns.
13157 \begin_inset space ~
13162 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
13165 \begin_layout Standard
13166 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
13179 Some classes provide additional sizes.
13184 depends on the class you are using.
13185 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
13188 \begin_layout Standard
13189 Note that the font size is the
13194 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
13195 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
13196 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
13197 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
13200 \begin_inset space ~
13206 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
13207 \begin_inset space ~
13211 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13213 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13220 \begin_layout Standard
13224 \begin_inset space ~
13229 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
13231 \begin_inset space ~
13234 serif or typewriter.
13239 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
13249 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
13252 \begin_layout Standard
13257 LaTeX font encoding
13259 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
13260 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13266 \begin_inset Index idx
13269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13277 \begin_inset space ~
13281 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13283 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
13288 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
13289 Unless you have specific reasons, use
13296 \begin_layout Standard
13297 With some fonts, the checkboxes
13299 Use Old Style Figures
13303 Use True Small Caps
13306 These are extra features some fonts provide.
13309 Use Old Style Figures
13311 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13313 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13314 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13318 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13321 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13325 Use True Small Caps
13327 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
13328 of scaled capitals.
13329 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
13330 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
13333 \begin_layout Standard
13338 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
13339 a font to display the script characters.
13343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13344 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13350 \begin_inset Index idx
13353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13360 So this has no effect for the document language
13376 \begin_layout Standard
13379 Enable micro-typographic extensions
13381 activates extensions such as character protrusion and font expansion via
13382 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13388 \begin_inset Index idx
13391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13393 packages ! microtype
13401 Output en- and em-dashes as ligatures
13403 outputs en- and em-dashes as ligatures (--, ---) instead of a sigle character.
13406 \begin_layout Standard
13407 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
13411 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13419 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
13424 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
13425 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
13427 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
13429 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
13432 dialog, see section
13433 \begin_inset space ~
13437 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13439 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
13451 \begin_layout Subsection
13455 \begin_layout Standard
13456 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
13457 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
13459 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
13460 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
13461 choose a math font in the dialog
13463 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13467 \begin_inset Index idx
13470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13471 Document ! Settings
13477 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
13478 automatically selects a math font.
13479 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
13480 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
13483 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13489 \begin_inset space ~
13495 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13500 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
13501 document font is available.
13504 \begin_layout Standard
13505 Note that the math font will not be used for
13509 (which is inserted with the shortcut
13515 or by the insertion of the command
13522 Also note that some math fonts are sans
13523 \begin_inset space ~
13527 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
13528 while the math characters do not.
13530 \begin_inset space ~
13533 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
13536 \begin_inset space ~
13544 \begin_inset space ~
13549 in the document font settings.
13552 \begin_layout Standard
13553 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
13554 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
13555 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
13556 font (in most cases
13557 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13563 \begin_inset space ~
13569 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13572 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
13573 variant of the document's class default font (in most
13575 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13581 \begin_inset space ~
13587 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13593 \begin_layout Subsection
13594 Using Different Character Styles
13595 \begin_inset Index idx
13598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13605 \begin_inset Index idx
13608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13617 \begin_layout Standard
13618 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
13619 automatically changes the character style for certain
13620 paragraph environments.
13622 supports two character styles,
13631 You can activate both of these styles via key bindings, the menus, and
13635 \begin_layout Standard
13640 style, do one of the following:
13643 \begin_layout Itemize
13644 click on the toolbar button
13653 \begin_layout Itemize
13654 use the key binding
13663 \begin_layout Standard
13664 These commands are all toggles.
13669 style is already active, they deactivate it.
13672 \begin_layout Standard
13673 One typically uses the
13677 style for proper names.
13679 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13686 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
13688 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13694 \begin_layout Standard
13695 A more widely used character style is the
13700 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
13707 \begin_layout Itemize
13708 clicking on the toolbar button
13717 \begin_layout Itemize
13718 using the keybindings
13727 \begin_layout Standard
13732 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
13734 use a different font.
13737 \begin_layout Standard
13738 We've been using the
13742 style all over the place in this document.
13743 Here's one more example:
13746 \begin_layout Quotation
13749 Do not overuse character styles!
13752 \begin_layout Standard
13753 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
13754 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
13755 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
13756 the common tendency to overuse character styles.
13760 \begin_layout Standard
13761 You can always reset to the default font using the key binding
13769 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13771 \begin_inset space ~
13774 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13780 arg "dialog-show character"
13786 \begin_layout Subsection
13787 Fine-Tuning with the
13792 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13794 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13799 \begin_inset Index idx
13802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13811 \begin_layout Standard
13812 There are always occasions when you will need to do some fine-tuning; so
13814 gives you a way to create a custom character style.
13815 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
13816 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
13817 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
13818 from ordinary dialog.
13821 \begin_layout Standard
13822 Before we document how to use custom character style, we want to issue a
13823 warning yet again: Don't overuse character styles!
13824 \begin_inset Newline newline
13827 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
13828 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
13831 \begin_layout Standard
13832 To use custom character styles, open the
13834 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13836 \begin_inset space ~
13839 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13842 dialog or press the toolbar button
13845 arg "dialog-show character"
13849 There are several boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
13850 font property that you can choose.
13851 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
13854 \begin_inset space ~
13859 , which keeps the current state of that property.
13864 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
13865 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
13866 environments all at once.
13869 \begin_layout Standard
13870 The font properties, and their options (in addition to
13873 \begin_inset space ~
13885 \begin_layout Labeling
13886 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13892 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13896 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13900 The possible options are:
13904 \begin_layout Labeling
13905 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13910 This is the Roman font family.
13911 Normally a serif font.
13912 It's also the default family.
13922 \begin_layout Labeling
13923 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13927 \begin_inset space ~
13934 This is the Sans Serif font family.
13946 \begin_layout Labeling
13947 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13954 This is the Typewriter font family.
13960 arg "font-typewriter"
13969 \begin_layout Labeling
13970 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13975 This corresponds to the print weight.
13980 \begin_layout Labeling
13981 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13986 This is the Medium font series.
13987 It's also the default series.
13990 \begin_layout Labeling
13991 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13998 This is the Bold font series.
14011 \begin_layout Labeling
14012 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14017 As the name implies.
14022 \begin_layout Labeling
14023 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14028 This is the Upright font shape.
14029 It's also the default shape.
14032 \begin_layout Labeling
14033 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14047 s the Italic font shape
14053 \begin_layout Labeling
14054 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14061 This is the Slanted font shape
14063 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
14064 , this is different from italic).
14067 \begin_layout Labeling
14068 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14072 \begin_inset space ~
14079 This is the Small caps font shape
14086 \begin_layout Labeling
14087 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14092 Alters the text color.
14093 Note that not all DVI-viewers are able to display colors.
14097 \begin_inset space ~
14102 , which means that the document default color set in
14104 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
14105 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
14111 \begin_inset space ~
14116 is used, you can choose between
14193 \begin_inset Index idx
14196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14205 \begin_layout Labeling
14206 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14211 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
14212 the language of the document.
14213 Text marked in this way will be underlined in blue to indicate the change
14214 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
14216 \begin_inset Newline newline
14219 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
14221 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
14222 When using the spell checking (see section
14223 \begin_inset space ~
14227 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14229 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
14233 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
14236 \begin_layout Labeling
14237 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14242 Alters the size of the font.
14243 You will find no numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually
14244 proportional to the document font size.
14245 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
14246 the details, but a general description of what
14252 \begin_layout Labeling
14253 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14261 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14265 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14274 arg "font-size tiny"
14280 \begin_layout Labeling
14281 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14289 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14293 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14302 arg "font-size scriptsize"
14308 \begin_layout Labeling
14309 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14317 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14321 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14330 arg "font-size footnotesize"
14336 \begin_layout Labeling
14337 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14345 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14349 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14358 arg "font-size small"
14364 \begin_layout Labeling
14365 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14371 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14375 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14379 It's also the default size.
14383 arg "font-size normal"
14389 \begin_layout Labeling
14390 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14398 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14402 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14411 arg "font-size large"
14417 \begin_layout Labeling
14418 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14426 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14430 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14439 arg "font-size larger"
14445 \begin_layout Labeling
14446 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14454 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14458 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14467 arg "font-size largest"
14473 \begin_layout Labeling
14474 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14482 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14486 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14495 arg "font-size huge"
14501 \begin_layout Labeling
14502 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14510 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14514 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14523 arg "font-size giant"
14529 \begin_layout Labeling
14530 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14535 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
14536 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14540 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14544 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14548 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14555 arg "font-size increase"
14561 \begin_layout Labeling
14562 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14567 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
14568 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14572 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14576 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14580 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14587 arg "font-size decrease"
14594 \begin_layout Standard
14599 : don't go crazy with this feature.
14600 You should almost never need to change the font size.
14602 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
14603 — use those instead.
14604 This is here for fine-tuning only!
14607 \begin_layout Labeling
14608 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14613 Here you can change a few other things at the character level.
14618 \begin_layout Labeling
14619 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14626 This is text with emphasize on
14629 This might seem like the same as
14633 , but it is actually a bit different.
14639 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
14641 Normally this font is equal to italic.
14644 \begin_layout Labeling
14645 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14652 This is text with Underbar on.
14658 arg "font-underline"
14664 \begin_inset Newline newline
14669 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
14670 when you could not change fonts.
14671 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
14672 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
14673 because some people
14677 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
14680 \begin_layout Labeling
14681 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14685 \begin_inset space ~
14692 This is text with Double underbar on.
14698 arg "font-underunderline"
14702 \begin_inset Newline newline
14705 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
14706 about double underbar.
14709 \begin_layout Labeling
14710 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14714 \begin_inset space ~
14721 This is text with Wavy underbar on.
14727 arg "font-underwave"
14731 \begin_inset Newline newline
14734 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
14735 Keep antinausea pills handy.
14738 \begin_layout Labeling
14739 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14743 \begin_inset space ~
14750 This is text with Strikeout on.
14756 arg "font-strikeout"
14760 \begin_inset Newline newline
14763 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
14764 changed in the meantime.
14767 \begin_layout Labeling
14768 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14772 \begin_inset space ~
14779 This is text with Cross out on.
14782 \begin_inset Newline newline
14785 This is used to make text hardly readable.
14788 \begin_layout Labeling
14789 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14796 This is text with Noun on.
14803 , this is a logical attribute.
14804 Normally it's equivalent to
14807 \begin_inset space ~
14816 \begin_layout Standard
14817 So you have a huge number of combinations to choose from.
14818 Once you have chosen a new character style via the
14820 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14822 \begin_inset space ~
14825 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14831 arg "dialog-show character"
14834 ) dialog, the settings are saved.
14835 You can activate them by using the toolbar button
14838 arg "textstyle-apply"
14842 The button lets you apply your custom character style even when the dialog
14846 \begin_layout Standard
14847 To completely reset the character style to the default, use
14854 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed
14855 (suppose you just set the shape to
14856 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14860 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14864 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14868 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14874 \begin_inset space ~
14886 \begin_layout Standard
14887 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
14895 \begin_inset space ~
14907 \begin_layout Itemize
14913 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14917 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14920 font, which means every character has the same width; the
14921 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14925 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14929 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14933 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14938 \begin_inset Newline newline
14942 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
14945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14956 \begin_inset Note Note
14959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14960 For more on phantoms see section
14961 \begin_inset space ~
14965 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14967 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
14977 \begin_inset Newline newline
14983 \begin_layout Itemize
14988 fonts use characters with serifs.
14989 These are the small
14990 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14994 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14997 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
14998 The following example shows the difference:
14999 \begin_inset Newline newline
15003 \begin_inset Newline newline
15008 text without serifs
15011 \begin_inset Newline newline
15014 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
15015 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
15022 \begin_layout Itemize
15027 is not recommended for use as a base type.
15028 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
15029 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
15032 \begin_layout Standard
15033 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15037 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15040 refers to applying or removing font properties.
15041 When a property is marked for toggling in the
15044 \begin_inset space ~
15049 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
15050 the property to be removed.
15051 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
15052 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
15053 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
15056 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15060 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15064 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15068 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15071 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
15072 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
15073 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15077 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15080 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
15084 \begin_inset space ~
15089 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
15092 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15096 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15100 If you, for example, set
15101 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15105 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15109 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15113 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15119 \begin_inset space ~
15124 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
15126 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15130 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15133 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
15136 \begin_layout Standard
15137 We conclude with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts!
15138 They are, more often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
15141 \begin_layout Section
15142 Printing and Previewing
15145 \begin_layout Subsection
15149 \begin_layout Standard
15150 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
15151 using \SpecialChar LyX
15152 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
15153 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
15154 goes on behind-the-scenes.
15155 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
15157 Additional Features
15162 \begin_layout Standard
15164 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
15167 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
15168 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
15169 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
15172 is what you use to do your actual writing.
15173 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
15174 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15175 to turn your writing into printable output.
15176 This happens in two stages:
15179 \begin_layout Enumerate
15180 First, \SpecialChar LyX
15181 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
15183 a file with the extension,
15184 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15192 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15198 \begin_layout Enumerate
15199 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
15200 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15201 to use the commands in the
15205 file to produce printable output.
15208 \begin_layout Subsection
15209 Output file formats
15210 \begin_inset Index idx
15213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15220 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15222 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
15229 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15230 Simple text (ASCII)
15231 \begin_inset Index idx
15234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15235 File formats ! ASCII
15243 \begin_layout Standard
15244 This file type has the extension
15245 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15253 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15257 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
15258 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15261 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
15262 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15268 \begin_layout Standard
15269 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
15271 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15272 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15274 \begin_inset space ~
15280 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
15281 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
15282 bibliography (section
15283 \begin_inset space ~
15287 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15289 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
15294 If your document includes such material, use
15296 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15297 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15299 \begin_inset space ~
15303 \begin_inset space ~
15307 \begin_inset space ~
15315 \begin_inset space ~
15319 \begin_inset space ~
15325 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
15326 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
15329 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15332 \begin_inset Index idx
15335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15336 File formats ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
15345 \begin_layout Standard
15346 This file type has the extension
15347 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15355 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15358 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15361 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
15362 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
15363 -Errors or to process it manually
15364 with console commands.
15365 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
15366 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
15367 's temporary directory whenever you
15368 view or export your document.
15371 \begin_layout Standard
15372 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
15373 -file using the menu
15375 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15376 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15380 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
15381 export variants are explained in section
15382 \begin_inset space ~
15386 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15388 reference "subsec:Export"
15395 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15397 \begin_inset Index idx
15400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15409 \begin_layout Standard
15410 This file type has the extension
15411 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15419 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15424 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15428 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15431 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
15432 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
15433 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
15437 \begin_layout Standard
15438 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
15439 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
15440 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
15441 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
15442 when you view the DVI.
15443 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
15446 \begin_layout Standard
15447 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
15449 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15450 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15455 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15456 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15458 \begin_inset space ~
15464 The latter option uses the program
15466 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15472 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15475 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15476 font access (see section
15477 \begin_inset space ~
15481 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15483 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15488 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15489 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15494 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15496 \begin_inset Index idx
15499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15500 File formats ! PostScript
15508 \begin_layout Standard
15509 This file type has the extension
15510 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15518 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15522 PostScript was developed by the company
15526 as a printer language.
15527 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
15529 PostScript can be seen as a
15530 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15533 programming language
15534 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15537 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
15541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15542 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15549 \begin_inset Index idx
15552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15554 packages ! pstricks
15564 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
15567 \begin_layout Standard
15568 PostScript can only contain images in the format
15569 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15572 Encapsulated PostScript
15573 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15576 (EPS, file extension
15577 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15585 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15589 As \SpecialChar LyX
15590 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
15591 convert them in the background to EPS.
15592 If, for example, you have 50
15593 \begin_inset space ~
15596 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
15598 \begin_inset space ~
15601 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
15602 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
15604 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
15605 EPS to avoid this problem.
15608 \begin_layout Standard
15609 You can export to PostScript using the menu
15611 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15612 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15618 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15620 \begin_inset Index idx
15623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15630 \begin_inset Index idx
15633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15642 \begin_layout Standard
15643 This file type has the extension
15644 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15652 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15657 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15660 Portable Document Format
15661 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15668 was derived from PostScript.
15669 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
15671 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15675 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15678 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
15679 looks exactly the same.
15682 \begin_layout Standard
15683 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
15684 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15687 Joint Photographic Experts Group
15688 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15691 (JPG, file extension
15692 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15700 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15704 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15712 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15716 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15719 Portable Network Graphics
15720 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15723 (PNG, file extension
15724 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15732 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15736 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
15737 converts them in the
15738 background to one of these formats.
15739 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
15740 will slow down your workflow.
15741 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
15744 \begin_layout Standard
15745 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
15747 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15753 \begin_layout Description
15755 \begin_inset space ~
15758 (pdflatex) This uses the program
15762 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15765 \begin_layout Description
15767 \begin_inset space ~
15774 ) This uses the program
15776 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15779 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15782 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15785 is a new engine, derived from
15789 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
15790 access (see section
15791 \begin_inset space ~
15795 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15797 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15802 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15803 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15808 \begin_layout Description
15810 \begin_inset space ~
15817 ) This uses the program
15822 that converts your file directly to PDF.
15828 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15829 font access (see section
15830 \begin_inset space ~
15834 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15836 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15841 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
15842 vertically written Japanese.
15845 \begin_layout Description
15847 \begin_inset space ~
15850 (cropped) This is the same as
15853 \begin_inset space ~
15858 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
15859 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
15860 to generate good-looking
15861 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
15864 \begin_layout Description
15866 \begin_inset space ~
15869 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
15873 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
15877 \begin_layout Description
15879 \begin_inset space ~
15882 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
15886 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
15887 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
15891 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
15892 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
15895 \begin_layout Standard
15899 \begin_inset space ~
15908 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
15909 works without problems.
15910 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
15911 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
15915 \begin_inset space ~
15923 \begin_inset space ~
15928 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
15936 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15938 \begin_inset Index idx
15941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15942 FileFormats ! XHTML
15948 \begin_inset Index idx
15951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15960 \begin_layout Standard
15961 This file type has the extension
15962 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15970 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15974 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
15975 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
15976 When \SpecialChar LyX
15977 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
15978 suitable for the purpose.
15979 For the math output you can choose in the menu
15981 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15982 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
15985 between different formats, which are described in section
15987 Math Output in XHTML
15992 \begin_inset space ~
16000 \begin_layout Standard
16001 XHTML output remains
16002 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16006 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16009 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
16010 features are supported yet.
16014 and the World Wide Web
16018 Additional Features
16020 manual, for more information.
16023 \begin_layout Standard
16024 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
16026 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16027 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16033 \begin_layout Subsection
16035 \begin_inset Index idx
16038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16047 \begin_layout Standard
16048 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
16049 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
16058 or use the toolbar button
16065 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
16066 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see section
16067 \begin_inset space ~
16071 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16073 reference "sec:File-Formats"
16077 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
16079 \begin_inset space ~
16083 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16085 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
16090 Further output formats can be selected via
16092 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16093 View (Other Formats)
16095 or the toolbar button
16104 \begin_layout Standard
16105 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
16106 viewer window using the menu
16108 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16113 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16114 Update (Other Formats)
16119 \begin_layout Standard
16120 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
16123 To have a real output, export your document.
16126 \begin_layout Section
16127 A few Words about Typography
16128 \begin_inset Index idx
16131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16140 \begin_layout Subsection
16141 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
16142 \begin_inset Index idx
16145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16152 \begin_inset Index idx
16155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16164 \begin_layout Standard
16165 In \SpecialChar LyX
16167 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16175 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16178 symbol comes in four variants: the
16195 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16201 \begin_layout Standard
16202 \begin_inset Box Frameless
16212 height_special "totalheight"
16217 backgroundcolor "none"
16220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16221 \begin_inset Tabular
16222 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
16223 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
16224 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
16225 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16226 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16227 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16228 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16237 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16246 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16256 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16257 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16266 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16275 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16279 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16287 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16296 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16297 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16306 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16315 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16319 system key combination
16323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16324 On Mac and Linux, the en dash is entered with
16327 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16331 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16336 and the em dash with
16339 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16343 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16352 is the Mac label for the right
16361 Alternatively, dashes can be inserted with
16363 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16365 \begin_inset space ~
16368 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16372 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16376 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16380 function with the Unicode code point as argument (2013 for the em dash
16381 and 2014 for the en dash).
16387 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16391 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16400 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16401 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16410 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16419 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16423 system key combination or
16424 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16428 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16438 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16447 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16451 \begin_inset Formula $-$
16459 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16463 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16471 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16490 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16496 \begin_layout Standard
16497 Dashes can also be inserted with
16499 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16501 \begin_inset space ~
16504 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16508 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16512 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16519 \begin_layout Standard
16520 Hyphen and dashes are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in math
16521 mode and has a length of its own.
16522 Here are some examples:
16525 \begin_layout Enumerate
16526 line- and page-breaks
16527 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16537 \begin_layout Enumerate
16539 \begin_inset space ~
16543 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16553 \begin_layout Enumerate
16554 The em dash is used without spaces: Oh—there's a dash.
16555 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16565 \begin_layout Enumerate
16566 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
16570 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16580 \begin_layout Standard
16582 \begin_inset CommandInset href
16584 name "Wikipedia entry on dashes"
16585 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dash"
16593 \begin_layout Subsection
16594 Dashes and Line Breaks
16595 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16597 name "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
16604 \begin_layout Standard
16605 Whether line breaks at dashes are allowed depends on the use case and locale:
16608 \begin_layout Itemize
16609 In English, line breaks are generally allowed after the dash in ranges of
16610 values such as 1975–1982, but no line break should occur if only a single
16611 character follows the dash (as in A–Z).
16614 \begin_layout Itemize
16615 In English, dashes used to set off parenthetical statements should not start
16619 \begin_layout Itemize
16620 In French and Spanish, dashes around parenthetical statements are treated
16621 similar to brackets: line breaks are not allowed on the inner side.
16624 \begin_layout Standard
16625 The dashes that are output by \SpecialChar LyX
16626 to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16627 by default generally allow for line breaks
16628 after en-dashes and em-dashes.
16631 \begin_layout Standard
16635 \begin_layout Enumerate
16636 Unwanted line breaks can be prevented by wrapping in a makebox
16640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16643 Prevent Hyphenation
16648 \begin_inset space ~
16658 , using protected spaces or preceding with
16664 in \SpecialChar TeX
16670 \begin_layout Itemize
16672 \begin_inset space ~
16676 \begin_inset Box Frameless
16686 height_special "totalheight"
16691 backgroundcolor "none"
16694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16703 \begin_layout Itemize
16704 With spaced en dashes
16705 \begin_inset space ~
16709 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16713 in British English and generally recommended by
16715 The Elements of Typographic Style
16718 \begin_inset space ~
16721 – line breaks should not occur before the dash.
16724 \begin_layout Itemize
16728 \begin_inset space ~
16731 même si tout le monde ne les aime pas
16732 \begin_inset space ~
16735 – sont très utiles.
16738 \begin_layout Itemize
16745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16754 —un inciso con rayas— se escribe así.
16757 \begin_layout Standard
16758 An incorrect line break is easily overlooked because
16759 \begin_inset space ~
16762 – in contrast to an overfull line
16763 \begin_inset space ~
16766 – it does not trigger a warning in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16771 \begin_layout Enumerate
16772 The default dashes output to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16773 disable hyphenation in words adjacent to hyphens
16774 and ligature dashes.
16777 \begin_layout Standard
16778 If you want to globally disable line breaks after dashes, you can select
16781 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16782 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
16783 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
16784 Disallow line breaks after dashes
16787 In this case optional line breaks after individual
16791 can be re-allowed via the menu
16793 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16794 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
16795 Optional line break
16800 \begin_layout Itemize
16801 Em-dashes without spaces—\SpecialChar allowbreak
16802 as common in American English—\SpecialChar allowbreak
16807 \begin_layout Standard
16808 Note: Up to \SpecialChar LyX
16810 \begin_inset space ~
16813 2.1, you could insert en-dashes and em-dashes as -- and ---, respectively;
16814 they were automatically merged to proper (breakable) dashes in the output,
16815 but kept as consecutive hyphen characters in the LyX document.
16816 If you inserted literal dash characters, however, they were output to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16822 dashes (this was actually rather by accident than intentionally, but some
16823 used these two forms of dashes deliberately).
16824 As of \SpecialChar LyX
16826 \begin_inset space ~
16829 2.2, things work differently: consecutive hyphens are merged to dashes immediatel
16834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16835 The behavior was changed since it led to different look in \SpecialChar LyX
16837 HTML export and the PDF export.
16842 If you copy consecutive hyphens, by contrast, they are output as consecutive
16844 An unintended consequence of this change was that all dashes now were output
16845 as non-breakable dashes.
16846 Since furthermore, in order to maintain the output, occurrences of consecutive
16847 hyphens in documents that were saved by \SpecialChar LyX
16849 \begin_inset space ~
16852 2.1 or earlier versions, were converted to literal en- and em-dash characters,
16853 respectively, these were output to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16854 in \SpecialChar LyX
16856 \begin_inset space ~
16864 An obvious drawback of all this was that it resulted in different line
16865 breaks in some documents.
16868 \begin_inset space ~
16871 2.3, by contrast and as outlined above, outputs
16875 dashes by default, so if you load a document saved previous to LyX 2.2,
16876 you should get the identical output with LyX 2.3 for the dashes inserted
16878 Furthermore, \SpecialChar LyX
16880 \begin_inset space ~
16883 2.3 provides the aforementioned option
16885 Disallow line breaks after dashes
16889 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16890 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
16894 It is off by default but selected when opening documents edited with \SpecialChar LyX
16896 \begin_inset space ~
16899 2.2 in order to maintain line breaking between \SpecialChar LyX
16900 2.2 and 2.3 (so these document
16901 have non-breakable dashes).
16902 \begin_inset Newline newline
16905 Note the following side-effects of the changes in \SpecialChar LyX
16909 \begin_layout Itemize
16910 If you used only literal em- and en dashes in pre-\SpecialChar LyX
16912 \begin_inset space ~
16915 2.2 documents, you must manually select
16917 Disallow line breaks after dashes
16919 to ensure unchanged behavior.
16923 \begin_layout Itemize
16924 If you used both literal and --/--- dashes in pre-\SpecialChar LyX
16926 \begin_inset space ~
16929 2.2 documents, you may need to enable or prevent individual line breaks as
16930 shown above to restore the correct line breaking behavior.
16933 \begin_layout Itemize
16934 Zero-width space (ZWSP) characters in older \SpecialChar LyX
16935 documents that follow literal
16936 em- and en-dashes are removed during the conversion to the format of \SpecialChar LyX
16938 \begin_inset space ~
16942 If you used them as optional line breaks after dashes, convert them to
16943 space insets before opening your document with \SpecialChar LyX
16945 \begin_inset space ~
16948 2.3 or the optional line breaks will be lost.
16951 \begin_layout Subsection
16953 \begin_inset Index idx
16956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16963 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16965 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
16972 \begin_layout Standard
16973 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
16974 but automatically in the output.
16975 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16981 \begin_inset Index idx
16984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16991 following the rules of the document language.
16994 \begin_layout Standard
16996 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
17000 font and with unusual constructs, like
17001 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17005 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17009 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
17010 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
17011 This is done with the menu
17013 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17014 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
17016 \begin_inset space ~
17022 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
17024 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
17028 \begin_layout Standard
17029 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
17030 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
17032 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17036 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17041 would then see the hyphen
17042 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17046 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17049 as a hyphenation possibility.
17050 Hyphenating at this point would look ugly.
17051 To prevent the shortcut from being hyphenated, you can use a protected
17054 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17055 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
17058 ) or put it into a makebox as described in section
17060 Prevent Hyphenation
17065 \begin_inset space ~
17073 \begin_layout Subsection
17075 \begin_inset Index idx
17078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17087 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17088 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
17089 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17091 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
17098 \begin_layout Standard
17099 When \SpecialChar LyX
17100 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
17101 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
17103 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
17106 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17109 appropriate amount of space.
17110 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17113 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
17115 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
17116 gets after another word.
17119 \begin_layout Standard
17120 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
17121 not work in all cases.
17123 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17131 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17134 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
17135 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
17138 \begin_layout Standard
17139 Here are some examples of
17143 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
17146 \begin_layout Itemize
17151 \begin_layout Itemize
17156 \begin_layout Standard
17157 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
17160 \begin_layout Itemize
17162 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17166 this is too much space!
17169 \begin_layout Itemize
17174 \begin_layout Standard
17175 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
17178 \begin_layout Standard
17179 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
17182 \begin_layout Enumerate
17186 \begin_inset space ~
17191 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
17192 \begin_inset space ~
17196 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17198 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
17203 \begin_inset Index idx
17206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17207 Spaces ! inter-word
17215 \begin_layout Enumerate
17219 \begin_inset space ~
17224 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
17225 \begin_inset space ~
17229 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17231 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
17236 \begin_inset Index idx
17239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17248 \begin_layout Enumerate
17252 \begin_inset space ~
17256 \begin_inset space ~
17260 \begin_inset space ~
17267 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17269 \begin_inset space ~
17274 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
17275 This function is also bound to
17278 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
17284 \begin_layout Standard
17285 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
17288 \begin_layout Itemize
17290 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17294 \begin_inset space \space{}
17297 this is too much space!
17300 \begin_layout Itemize
17301 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
17305 \begin_layout Standard
17306 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
17307 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
17309 will take care of this.
17312 \begin_layout Standard
17313 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
17317 \begin_inset space ~
17323 feature described in the section
17325 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
17330 Additional Features
17335 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17337 \begin_inset Index idx
17340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17341 Typography ! Quotation marks
17347 \begin_inset Index idx
17350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17351 Quotation marks | see
17355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17381 \begin_layout Standard
17383 usually sets quotation marks correctly.
17384 Specifically, it will insert an opening mark at the beginning of quoted
17385 text, and use a closing mark at the end.
17387 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17391 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17395 The keyboard character,
17399 , generates this automatically.
17402 \begin_layout Standard
17403 You can specify what character the
17407 key produces by using the submenu
17413 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17417 \begin_inset Index idx
17420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17421 Document ! Settings
17426 dialog and switching the
17430 (note that \SpecialChar LyX
17431 makes a sensible proposal for the selected main language).
17433 \begin_inset space ~
17439 \begin_layout Labeling
17440 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17444 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17448 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17452 \begin_inset space ~
17456 \begin_inset space ~
17460 \begin_inset Quotes els
17464 \begin_inset Quotes ers
17470 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17474 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17478 \begin_inset Quotes els
17482 \begin_inset Quotes ers
17485 quotation marks (as common, e.
17486 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17492 \begin_layout Labeling
17493 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17496 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17500 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17504 \begin_inset space ~
17508 \begin_inset space ~
17512 \begin_inset Quotes sls
17516 \begin_inset Quotes srs
17522 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17526 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17530 \begin_inset Quotes sls
17534 \begin_inset Quotes srs
17537 quotation marks (as common, e.
17538 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17544 \begin_layout Labeling
17545 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17548 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17552 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17556 \begin_inset space ~
17560 \begin_inset space ~
17564 \begin_inset Quotes gls
17568 \begin_inset Quotes grs
17574 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17578 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17582 \begin_inset Quotes gls
17586 \begin_inset Quotes grs
17589 quotation marks (as common, e.
17590 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17596 \begin_layout Labeling
17597 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17600 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17604 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17608 \begin_inset space ~
17612 \begin_inset space ~
17616 \begin_inset Quotes pls
17620 \begin_inset Quotes prs
17626 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17630 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17634 \begin_inset Quotes pls
17638 \begin_inset Quotes prs
17641 quotation marks (as common, e.
17642 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17648 \begin_layout Labeling
17649 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17652 \begin_inset Quotes cld
17656 \begin_inset Quotes crd
17660 \begin_inset space ~
17664 \begin_inset space ~
17668 \begin_inset Quotes cls
17672 \begin_inset Quotes crs
17678 \begin_inset Quotes cld
17682 \begin_inset Quotes crd
17686 \begin_inset Quotes cls
17690 \begin_inset Quotes crs
17693 quotation marks (as common, e.
17694 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17697 g., in Switzerland)
17700 \begin_layout Labeling
17701 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17704 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17708 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17712 \begin_inset space ~
17716 \begin_inset space ~
17720 \begin_inset Quotes als
17724 \begin_inset Quotes ars
17730 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17734 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17738 \begin_inset Quotes als
17742 \begin_inset Quotes ars
17745 quotation marks (as common, e.
17746 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17752 \begin_layout Labeling
17753 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17756 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17760 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17764 \begin_inset space ~
17768 \begin_inset space ~
17772 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17776 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17782 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17786 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17790 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17794 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17797 quotation marks (so-called plain or non-typographical quotation marks)
17800 \begin_layout Labeling
17801 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17804 \begin_inset Quotes bld
17808 \begin_inset Quotes brd
17812 \begin_inset space ~
17816 \begin_inset space ~
17820 \begin_inset Quotes bls
17824 \begin_inset Quotes brs
17830 \begin_inset Quotes bld
17834 \begin_inset Quotes brd
17838 \begin_inset Quotes bls
17842 \begin_inset Quotes brs
17845 quotation marks (as common, e.
17846 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17849 g., in Great Britain)
17852 \begin_layout Labeling
17853 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17856 \begin_inset Quotes fld
17860 \begin_inset Quotes frd
17864 \begin_inset space ~
17868 \begin_inset space ~
17872 \begin_inset Quotes fls
17876 \begin_inset Quotes frs
17882 \begin_inset Quotes fld
17886 \begin_inset Quotes frd
17890 \begin_inset Quotes fls
17894 \begin_inset Quotes frs
17897 quotation marks (as common, e.
17898 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17904 \begin_layout Labeling
17905 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17908 \begin_inset Quotes ild
17912 \begin_inset Quotes ird
17916 \begin_inset space ~
17920 \begin_inset space ~
17924 \begin_inset Quotes ils
17928 \begin_inset Quotes irs
17934 \begin_inset Quotes ild
17938 \begin_inset Quotes ird
17942 \begin_inset Quotes ils
17946 \begin_inset Quotes irs
17949 quotation marks (another style common in France)
17953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17954 Maybe you wonder why one does not simply use only outer marks in this case,
17955 since these look identical to the inner marks.
17956 The answer is that you cannot easily switch to another style then (where
17957 the inner marks differ).
17965 \begin_layout Labeling
17966 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17969 \begin_inset Quotes rld
17973 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
17977 \begin_inset space ~
17981 \begin_inset space ~
17985 \begin_inset Quotes rls
17989 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
17995 \begin_inset Quotes rld
17999 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
18003 \begin_inset Quotes rls
18007 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
18010 quotation marks (as common, e.
18011 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18017 \begin_layout Labeling
18018 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18021 \begin_inset Quotes wld
18025 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
18029 \begin_inset space ~
18033 \begin_inset space ~
18037 \begin_inset Quotes wls
18041 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
18047 \begin_inset Quotes wld
18051 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
18055 \begin_inset Quotes wls
18059 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
18062 quotation marks (another style common in Sweden)
18065 \begin_layout Labeling
18066 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18067 \begin_inset Quotes jld
18075 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
18081 \begin_inset space ~
18085 \begin_inset space ~
18091 \begin_inset Quotes jls
18099 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
18103 \begin_inset Quotes jld
18107 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
18111 \begin_inset Quotes jls
18115 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
18118 quotation marks (as common, e.
18119 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18127 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
18128 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
18136 \begin_layout Labeling
18137 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18138 \begin_inset Quotes kld
18146 \begin_inset Quotes krd
18152 \begin_inset space ~
18156 \begin_inset space ~
18162 \begin_inset Quotes kls
18170 \begin_inset Quotes krs
18174 \begin_inset Quotes kld
18178 \begin_inset Quotes krd
18182 \begin_inset Quotes kls
18186 \begin_inset Quotes krs
18189 quotation marks (as common, e.
18190 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18193 g., in North Korea and China)
18197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18198 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
18199 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
18207 \begin_layout Standard
18208 Inner quotation marks
18212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18213 In many writing cultures, these are single quotation marks.
18214 But as the British and French styles show, this is not necessarily the
18215 case (and specifically the British style shows that
18216 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18220 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18223 does not necessarily mean
18224 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18228 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18232 This is why we call them
18233 \begin_inset Quotes els
18237 \begin_inset Quotes ers
18241 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18245 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18253 for quotations inside quotations (and other tasks in some languages, such
18255 \begin_inset Quotes els
18259 \begin_inset Quotes ers
18262 ) can be obtained by means of the shortcut
18265 arg "quote-insert inner"
18270 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18276 \begin_layout Standard
18277 By default, the quotation mark styles are persistent.
18278 That is to say, a quotation mark maintains the style that was current when
18279 it was inserted, even if the document-wide style changes.
18280 This allows you to enter marks of different style.
18281 If you check the setting
18283 Use dynamic quotation marks
18287 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18288 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18291 , however, special quotation marks will be inserted (in the LyX window,
18292 they appear in a special color).
18293 These marks will automatically adapt to the main style (and its changes).
18294 Such quotation marks make it easy to alter the quotation mark style in
18296 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18299 g., if your publisher requests a different style).
18302 \begin_layout Standard
18303 Individual quotation marks (i.
18304 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18307 e., their level [inner, outer], side [opening, closing], and style) can be
18308 easily switched by a context menu that pops up if you right-click on a
18312 \begin_layout Subsection
18314 \begin_inset Index idx
18317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18318 Typography ! Ligatures
18324 \begin_inset Index idx
18327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18356 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18358 name "subsec:Ligatures"
18365 \begin_layout Standard
18366 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
18367 print them as single characters.
18368 These groups are known as
18373 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
18374 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
18376 Here are the standard ligatures:
18379 \begin_layout Itemize
18383 \begin_layout Itemize
18387 \begin_layout Itemize
18391 \begin_layout Itemize
18395 \begin_layout Itemize
18399 \begin_layout Standard
18400 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
18403 \begin_layout Standard
18404 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
18405 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
18406 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18410 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18413 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
18414 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18418 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18422 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18426 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18429 To break a ligature, use
18431 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18432 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18434 \begin_inset space ~
18441 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18445 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18449 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18452 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
18454 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18458 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18462 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18466 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18469 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
18471 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18477 \begin_layout Subsection
18479 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
18481 \begin_inset Index idx
18484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18494 \begin_layout Standard
18497 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18498 Special Characters\SpecialChar menuseparator
18502 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
18505 \begin_layout Description
18507 The name of the game.
18510 \begin_layout Description
18512 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
18516 \begin_layout Description
18518 The \SpecialChar TeX
18519 macro collection used by \SpecialChar LyX
18523 \begin_layout Description
18524 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
18525 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
18529 \begin_layout Standard
18530 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18532 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18536 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
18540 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18544 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
18545 world to give programs geek version numbers.
18546 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
18547 converges to the number
18548 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
18551 : The actual version is
18552 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18557 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18560 , the previous one was
18561 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18566 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18572 \begin_layout Subsection
18574 \begin_inset Index idx
18577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18586 \begin_layout Standard
18587 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
18588 space between two words.
18589 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
18592 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18596 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18599 for units use the menu
18601 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18602 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18604 \begin_inset space ~
18612 arg "space-insert thin"
18618 \begin_layout Standard
18619 Here is an example to show the differences:
18622 \begin_layout Standard
18623 \begin_inset Tabular
18624 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
18625 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
18626 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
18627 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
18629 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18634 \begin_inset space ~
18638 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
18646 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18650 space between number and unit
18657 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18662 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18666 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
18674 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18678 half space between number and unit
18691 \begin_layout Subsection
18693 \begin_inset Index idx
18696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18697 Typography ! Widows and orphans
18705 \begin_layout Standard
18706 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
18708 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
18709 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
18710 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
18711 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
18712 These bits of text became known as
18723 \begin_layout Standard
18724 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
18725 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
18726 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
18727 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
18728 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
18729 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
18730 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
18731 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
18732 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
18733 \begin_inset Newline newline
18741 \begin_inset Newline newline
18749 \begin_inset Newline newline
18752 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18753 preamble of your document to avoid them.
18754 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
18756 \begin_inset space ~
18760 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
18762 key "latexcompanion"
18768 \begin_inset space ~
18772 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
18779 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
18780 's page break mechanism.
18783 \begin_layout Chapter
18784 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
18785 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18787 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
18794 \begin_layout Standard
18795 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
18798 \begin_inset space ~
18804 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
18807 \begin_layout Section
18809 \begin_inset Index idx
18812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18819 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18828 \begin_layout Standard
18830 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
18833 \begin_layout Description
18836 \begin_inset space ~
18839 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
18840 \begin_inset Newline newline
18844 \begin_inset Note Note
18847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18848 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
18856 \begin_layout Description
18857 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
18858 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
18859 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18862 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
18863 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
18865 \begin_inset space ~
18871 \begin_inset Newline newline
18875 \begin_inset Note Comment
18878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18879 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
18888 \begin_layout Description
18890 \begin_inset space ~
18893 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
18894 set in the document settings under
18896 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
18898 \begin_inset space ~
18904 \begin_inset Newline newline
18908 \begin_inset Newline newline
18912 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
18915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18921 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
18922 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
18927 of a comment that appears in the output.
18933 \begin_inset Newline newline
18937 \begin_inset Newline newline
18940 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
18943 \begin_layout Standard
18944 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
18952 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18956 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
18959 \begin_layout Section
18961 \begin_inset Index idx
18964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18971 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18973 name "sec:Footnotes"
18980 \begin_layout Standard
18982 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
18985 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18988 or the toolbar button
18991 arg "footnote-insert"
19003 \begin_inset Graphics
19004 filename clipart/footnote.png
19013 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
19014 's representation of your footnote.
19024 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19032 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19043 label, the box will
19047 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
19048 Clicking on the box label again will close
19061 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
19062 and click on the footnote
19077 \begin_layout Standard
19078 Here is an example footnote:
19086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19087 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
19095 \begin_layout Standard
19096 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
19097 position where the footnote box is placed.
19098 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
19099 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
19100 according to the document class.
19102 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
19103 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
19109 ey are described in the
19112 \begin_inset space ~
19120 \begin_layout Section
19122 \begin_inset Index idx
19125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19132 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19134 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
19141 \begin_layout Standard
19142 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
19144 When you insert a margin note via the menu
19146 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19148 \begin_inset space ~
19153 or the toolbar button
19156 arg "marginalnote-insert"
19175 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19179 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19182 appearing within your text.
19183 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
19184 's representation of your margin
19193 \begin_layout Standard
19194 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
19198 \begin_inset Marginal
19201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19203 This is a marginal note.
19211 \begin_layout Standard
19212 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
19213 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
19214 pages, right on odd pages.
19217 \begin_layout Standard
19218 For further information about marginal notes see the section
19221 \begin_inset space ~
19229 \begin_inset space ~
19237 \begin_layout Section
19238 Graphics and Images
19239 \begin_inset Index idx
19242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19249 \begin_inset Index idx
19252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19259 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19261 name "sec:Graphics"
19268 \begin_layout Standard
19269 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
19270 you want and click on the toolbar icon
19273 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
19278 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19282 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
19285 \begin_layout Standard
19286 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
19291 tab allows you to choose your image file.
19292 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
19294 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
19295 \begin_inset space ~
19299 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19301 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
19308 \begin_layout Standard
19313 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
19314 of the image in the output.
19315 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
19319 \begin_inset space ~
19323 \begin_inset space ~
19332 \begin_inset space ~
19336 \begin_inset space ~
19340 \begin_inset space ~
19345 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
19346 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
19354 \begin_layout Standard
19358 \begin_inset space ~
19362 \begin_inset space ~
19367 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
19368 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
19370 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
19375 \begin_inset space ~
19380 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
19381 with the image size is printed.
19384 \begin_layout Standard
19385 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
19386 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
19388 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
19391 \begin_layout Standard
19393 \begin_inset Graphics
19394 filename clipart/2D-intensity-plot.pdf
19402 \begin_layout Standard
19403 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
19404 the image into a float, see section
19405 \begin_inset space ~
19409 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19411 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
19418 \begin_layout Subsection
19420 \begin_inset Index idx
19423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19430 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19432 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
19439 \begin_layout Standard
19440 You can insert images in any known file format.
19441 But as we explained in section
19442 \begin_inset space ~
19446 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19448 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
19452 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
19454 therefore uses the program
19458 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
19459 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
19460 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
19461 \begin_inset space ~
19465 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19467 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
19474 \begin_layout Standard
19475 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
19478 \begin_layout Description
19480 \begin_inset space ~
19483 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
19484 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
19485 Well-known bitmap image formats are
19486 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19489 Graphics Interchange Format
19490 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19493 (GIF, file extension
19494 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19502 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19506 \begin_inset Index idx
19509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19538 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19541 Portable Network Graphics
19542 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19545 (PNG, file extension
19546 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19554 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19558 \begin_inset Index idx
19561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19590 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19593 Joint Photographic Experts Group
19594 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19597 (JPG, file extension
19598 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19606 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19610 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19618 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19622 \begin_inset Index idx
19625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19656 \begin_layout Description
19658 \begin_inset space ~
19661 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
19663 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
19664 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
19665 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
19666 \begin_inset Newline newline
19669 Scalable image formats can be
19670 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19673 Scalable Vector Graphics
19674 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19677 (SVG, file extension
19678 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19686 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19690 \begin_inset Index idx
19693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19722 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19725 Encapsulated PostScript
19726 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19729 (EPS, file extension
19730 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19738 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19742 \begin_inset Index idx
19745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19774 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19777 Portable Document Format
19778 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19781 (PDF, file extension
19782 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19790 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19794 \begin_inset Index idx
19797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19805 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19809 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19812 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
19813 result will not be scalable.
19814 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
19819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19820 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
19828 \begin_layout Standard
19829 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
19836 \begin_layout Subsection
19837 Grouping of Image Settings
19838 \begin_inset Index idx
19841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19842 Images ! Settings grouping
19850 \begin_layout Standard
19851 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
19853 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
19854 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
19856 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
19857 need to manually change each of them.
19861 \begin_layout Standard
19862 A new group can be set by pressing the button
19865 \begin_inset space ~
19869 \begin_inset space ~
19881 \begin_inset space ~
19885 \begin_inset space ~
19891 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
19892 and checking the name of the desired group.
19895 \begin_layout Section
19897 \begin_inset Index idx
19900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19907 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19916 \begin_layout Standard
19917 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
19920 arg "tabular-insert"
19925 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19929 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns.
19930 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
19931 from the rest of the table.
19932 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
19933 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
19935 Here is an example table:
19938 \begin_layout Standard
19940 \begin_inset Tabular
19941 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
19942 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
19943 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19944 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19945 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
19946 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19948 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19957 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19975 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19984 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19995 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20013 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20022 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20031 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20042 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20060 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20069 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20082 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20093 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20111 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20120 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20129 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20146 \begin_layout Subsection
20150 \begin_layout Standard
20151 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
20154 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
20158 This brings up the table dialog.
20159 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
20160 cursor is placed currently.
20161 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
20162 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
20163 done on all of your selection.
20166 \begin_layout Standard
20167 In addition to the table dialog, the
20170 \begin_inset space ~
20175 helps you in setting table properties.
20176 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
20179 \begin_layout Standard
20183 \begin_inset space ~
20188 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
20189 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
20190 current cell respectively.
20191 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
20193 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
20194 of text, see section
20195 \begin_inset space ~
20199 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20201 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
20208 \begin_layout Standard
20209 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
20210 using the check box
20219 This will merge the cells to
20223 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
20224 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
20225 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
20226 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
20227 in the last row without the upper border:
20230 \begin_layout Standard
20232 \begin_inset Tabular
20233 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
20234 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
20235 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20236 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
20237 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
20238 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20240 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20249 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20258 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20267 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20278 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20296 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20305 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20314 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20325 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20334 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20343 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20352 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20369 \begin_layout Standard
20370 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
20371 -arguments for the table.
20372 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
20373 explained in the chapter
20380 \begin_inset space ~
20386 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
20387 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
20388 but are visible in the output.
20391 \begin_layout Standard
20392 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
20395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20400 Most DVI-viewers are
20404 able to display rotations.
20412 \begin_layout Standard
20417 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
20422 adds lines for all cell borders.
20425 \begin_layout Subsection
20427 \begin_inset Index idx
20430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20431 Tables ! Multi-page
20437 \begin_inset Index idx
20440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20449 \begin_layout Standard
20450 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
20453 \begin_inset space ~
20457 \begin_inset space ~
20465 \begin_inset space ~
20470 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
20471 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
20474 \begin_layout Description
20479 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
20480 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
20481 Except for the first page, if
20484 \begin_inset space ~
20492 \begin_layout Description
20496 \begin_inset space ~
20501 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
20502 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
20505 \begin_layout Description
20510 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
20511 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
20512 except for the last page, if
20515 \begin_inset space ~
20523 \begin_layout Description
20527 \begin_inset space ~
20532 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
20533 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
20536 \begin_layout Description
20537 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
20538 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
20540 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20544 More about multi-page table captions can be found in the
20547 \begin_inset space ~
20555 \begin_layout Standard
20556 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
20557 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
20558 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
20564 In this context, first means first in this order:
20567 \begin_inset space ~
20579 \begin_inset space ~
20584 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
20587 \begin_layout Standard
20589 \begin_inset Tabular
20590 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
20591 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
20592 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
20593 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20594 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20595 <row endfirsthead="true">
20596 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20602 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
20607 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20616 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20626 <row endfirsthead="true">
20627 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20638 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20647 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20659 <row endhead="true">
20660 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20671 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20680 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20690 <row endhead="true">
20691 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20702 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20711 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20723 <row endfoot="true">
20724 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20735 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20744 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20755 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20766 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20775 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20786 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20797 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20806 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20817 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20828 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20837 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20848 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20859 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20868 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20879 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20890 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20899 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20910 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20921 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20930 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20941 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20952 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20961 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20972 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20983 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20992 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21003 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21014 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21023 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21034 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21045 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21054 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21065 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21076 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21085 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21096 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21107 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21116 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21127 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21138 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21147 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21158 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21169 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21178 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21189 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21200 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21209 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21220 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21231 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21240 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21251 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21262 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21271 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21282 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21293 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21302 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21313 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21324 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21333 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21344 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21355 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21364 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21375 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21386 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21395 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21406 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21417 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21426 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21437 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21448 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21457 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21468 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21479 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21488 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21499 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21510 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21519 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21530 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21541 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21550 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21561 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21572 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21581 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21592 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21603 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21612 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21623 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21634 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21643 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21654 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21665 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21674 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21685 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21696 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21705 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21716 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21725 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
21728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21734 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21745 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21756 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21765 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21776 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21787 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21796 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21807 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21818 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21827 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21838 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21849 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21858 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21869 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21880 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21889 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21900 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21911 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21920 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21931 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21942 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21951 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21962 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21973 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21982 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21993 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22004 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22013 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22024 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22035 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22044 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22055 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22066 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22075 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22086 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22097 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22106 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22117 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22128 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22137 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22148 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22159 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22168 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22179 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22190 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22199 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22210 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22221 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22230 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22241 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22252 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22261 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22272 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22283 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22292 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22303 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22314 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22323 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22334 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22345 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22354 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22365 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22376 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22385 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22396 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22407 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22416 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22427 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22438 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22447 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22458 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22469 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22478 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22489 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22500 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22509 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22520 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22531 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22540 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22551 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22562 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22571 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22582 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22593 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22602 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22613 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22624 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22633 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22644 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22655 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22664 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22675 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22686 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22695 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22705 <row endlastfoot="true">
22706 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22717 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
22720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22726 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22743 \begin_layout Subsection
22745 \begin_inset Index idx
22748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22755 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22757 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
22764 \begin_layout Standard
22765 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
22766 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
22767 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
22768 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
22772 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
22775 \begin_layout Standard
22776 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
22777 for the column in the table dialog.
22778 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
22779 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
22783 \begin_layout Standard
22785 \begin_inset Tabular
22786 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
22787 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
22788 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22789 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
22790 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22792 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22810 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22828 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22848 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22866 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22879 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
22884 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22904 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22922 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22935 This is longer now.
22940 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22960 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22978 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22991 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
22992 This is longer now.
22997 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23023 \begin_layout Standard
23024 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
23025 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
23029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23030 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
23031 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
23037 Selection with the mouse or with
23041 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
23042 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
23043 the selection from outside the table.
23046 \begin_layout Section
23048 \begin_inset Index idx
23051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23058 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23067 \begin_layout Subsection
23071 \begin_layout Standard
23072 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
23073 have a fixed location.
23075 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23079 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23082 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
23090 \begin_inset space ~
23095 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
23096 too many notes on the current page.
23099 \begin_layout Standard
23100 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
23101 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
23102 and pages without text.
23103 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
23104 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
23105 Floats are therefore numbered.
23106 Referencing is described in section
23107 \begin_inset space ~
23111 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23113 reference "sec:Cross-References"
23120 \begin_layout Standard
23121 To insert a float, use the menu
23123 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23127 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
23128 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
23130 After the label you can insert the caption text.
23131 \begin_inset Index idx
23134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23140 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
23141 paragraph within the float.
23142 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
23143 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
23144 left-clicking on the box label.
23145 A closed float box looks like this:
23146 \begin_inset Graphics
23147 filename clipart/float.png
23152 – a gray button with a red label.
23155 \begin_layout Standard
23156 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
23158 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
23161 \begin_layout Subsection
23163 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23165 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
23170 \begin_inset Index idx
23173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23174 Floats ! Figure floats
23182 \begin_layout Standard
23184 \begin_inset space ~
23188 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23190 reference "fig:A-star-in"
23194 was created using the menu
23196 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23197 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
23203 arg "float-insert figure"
23207 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
23210 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23216 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
23220 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
23221 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
23223 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
23225 \begin_inset space ~
23233 arg "layout-paragraph"
23239 \begin_layout Standard
23240 \begin_inset Float figure
23245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23247 \begin_inset Graphics
23248 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
23257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23258 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23261 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23263 name "fig:A-star-in"
23280 \begin_layout Standard
23281 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
23282 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
23284 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23293 ) and refer to it using the menu
23295 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23301 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
23305 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
23306 vague references like
23307 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23311 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23314 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
23315 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
23317 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23321 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23325 For more about cross-references, see section
23326 \begin_inset space ~
23330 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23332 reference "sec:Cross-References"
23339 \begin_layout Standard
23340 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
23341 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
23342 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
23343 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
23344 as described in section
23345 \begin_inset space ~
23349 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23351 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
23357 \begin_inset space ~
23361 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23363 reference "fig:Two-images"
23367 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
23368 You can also set the images one below the other.
23370 \begin_inset space ~
23374 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23376 reference "fig:Undefinable"
23381 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23383 reference "fig:Star"
23387 are the subfigures.
23390 \begin_layout Standard
23391 \begin_inset Float figure
23396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23397 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23401 \begin_inset Float figure
23406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23407 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23410 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23412 name "fig:Undefinable"
23424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23425 \begin_inset Graphics
23426 filename clipart/3D-structure-distort.pdf
23438 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23442 \begin_inset Float figure
23447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23448 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23451 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23466 \begin_inset Graphics
23467 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
23479 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23486 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23489 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23491 name "fig:Two-images"
23508 \begin_layout Subsection
23510 \begin_inset Index idx
23513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23514 Floats ! Table floats
23522 \begin_layout Standard
23523 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
23525 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23526 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
23529 or the toolbar button
23532 arg "float-insert table"
23536 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
23537 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
23538 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
23540 \begin_inset space ~
23544 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23546 reference "tab:Table-float"
23553 \begin_layout Standard
23554 \begin_inset Float table
23559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23560 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23563 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23565 name "tab:Table-float"
23577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23579 \begin_inset Tabular
23580 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
23581 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
23582 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23583 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23584 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23586 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23604 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23622 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23642 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23660 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23678 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23698 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23711 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
23719 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23732 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
23735 \end{array}\right]$
23743 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23756 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
23777 \begin_layout Subsection
23779 \begin_inset Index idx
23782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23791 \begin_layout Standard
23793 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
23794 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
23795 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
23797 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
23805 \begin_inset space ~
23813 \begin_layout Section
23815 \begin_inset Index idx
23818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23827 \begin_layout Standard
23829 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
23831 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
23832 \begin_inset space \space{}
23839 \begin_layout Standard
23840 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
23841 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
23843 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23847 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
23848 and its alignment within the page.
23851 \begin_layout Standard
23853 \begin_inset Box Frameless
23863 height_special "totalheight"
23868 backgroundcolor "none"
23871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23874 This is a minipage.
23875 The text is set in an italic style.
23878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23881 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
23882 another formatting.
23890 \begin_layout Standard
23891 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
23894 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
23898 as described in section
23899 \begin_inset space ~
23903 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23905 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
23910 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
23916 \begin_layout Standard
23917 \begin_inset Box Frameless
23927 height_special "totalheight"
23932 backgroundcolor "none"
23935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23936 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
23937 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
23943 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23947 \begin_inset Box Frameless
23957 height_special "totalheight"
23962 backgroundcolor "none"
23965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23966 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
23967 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
23975 \begin_layout Standard
23976 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
23982 \begin_layout Standard
23983 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
23985 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
23992 \begin_inset space ~
24000 \begin_layout Chapter
24001 Mathematical Formulas
24002 \begin_inset Index idx
24005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24012 \begin_inset Index idx
24015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24044 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24046 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
24053 \begin_layout Standard
24054 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
24059 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
24062 \begin_layout Section
24064 \begin_inset Index idx
24067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24076 \begin_layout Standard
24077 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
24090 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
24092 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
24093 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
24094 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
24096 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24102 \begin_layout Standard
24103 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
24107 \begin_inset space ~
24112 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
24115 \begin_layout Standard
24116 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
24117 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
24120 \begin_layout Standard
24121 This is a line with an inline formula
24122 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
24128 \begin_layout Standard
24129 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
24130 paragraph, like this one:
24131 \begin_inset Formula
24138 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
24141 \begin_layout Standard
24143 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
24145 For example, typing
24146 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24156 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24159 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
24160 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
24164 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
24167 \begin_inset space ~
24175 \begin_layout Subsection
24176 Navigating in Formulas
24177 \begin_inset Index idx
24180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24189 \begin_layout Standard
24190 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
24191 achieved with the arrow keys.
24193 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
24194 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
24199 will leave a formula construct (a square root
24200 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
24204 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
24208 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
24211 \end{array}\right]$
24219 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
24224 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
24225 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
24228 \begin_layout Standard
24233 , printed in this document as
24234 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24238 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24242 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24245 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
24246 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
24247 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
24252 For example, if you want
24253 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
24261 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24271 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24275 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24280 , since in the latter case only the
24283 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
24288 will be under the square root sign:
24289 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
24295 \begin_layout Standard
24296 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
24298 \begin_inset Formula
24300 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
24309 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
24310 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
24313 \begin_layout Subsection
24317 \begin_layout Standard
24318 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
24319 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
24323 and a cursor movement key to select text.
24324 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
24325 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
24326 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
24327 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
24331 \begin_layout Subsection
24332 Exponents and Subscripts
24333 \begin_inset Index idx
24336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24343 \begin_inset Index idx
24346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24355 \begin_layout Standard
24356 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
24359 arg "math-superscript"
24365 arg "math-subscript"
24368 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
24370 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
24373 , type in a formula
24376 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24386 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
24392 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
24396 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
24402 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24408 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
24410 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24414 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24417 , you have to use an extra
24421 to separate the circumflex and the character.
24422 For example, if you want
24423 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
24429 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24435 Subscripts are similar: To get
24436 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
24442 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24450 \begin_layout Subsection
24452 \begin_inset Index idx
24455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24464 \begin_layout Standard
24465 Create a fraction either with the command
24471 or by using the icon
24474 arg "math-insert \\frac"
24480 \begin_inset space ~
24486 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
24487 The cursor is above the fraction line.
24488 To move it to the bottom, simply press
24493 To move back up, press
24498 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
24499 \begin_inset Formula
24501 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
24504 \end{array}\right)}\right]
24512 \begin_layout Subsection
24514 \begin_inset Index idx
24517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24526 \begin_layout Standard
24527 Roots can be created using the
24530 \begin_inset space ~
24538 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
24544 arg "math-insert \\root"
24566 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
24572 always produces a square root.
24575 \begin_layout Subsection
24576 Operators with Limits
24577 \begin_inset Index idx
24580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24587 \begin_inset Index idx
24590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24597 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24599 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
24606 \begin_layout Standard
24608 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
24612 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
24615 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
24616 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
24617 by entering them as you would enter a super-
24618 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
24619 The sum operator will automatically place its
24620 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24624 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24627 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
24629 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
24633 \begin_inset Formula
24635 \sum\nolimits _{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
24640 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
24644 \begin_layout Standard
24645 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
24647 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
24648 behind the operator and using the menu
24650 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24651 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
24653 \begin_inset space ~
24657 \begin_inset space ~
24671 \begin_layout Standard
24672 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
24673 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24677 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24681 \begin_inset Index idx
24684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24691 \begin_inset Formula
24693 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
24698 which will place the
24699 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
24703 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24707 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24711 In inline formulas it looks like this:
24712 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
24718 \begin_layout Standard
24719 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
24726 Have a look at section
24727 \begin_inset space ~
24731 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24733 reference "subsec:Functions"
24737 for an explanation of function macros.
24740 \begin_layout Subsection
24742 \begin_inset Index idx
24745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24754 \begin_layout Standard
24755 Most math symbols can be found in the
24758 \begin_inset space ~
24763 under one of several categories; including
24780 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
24784 \begin_layout Standard
24785 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
24786 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
24787 don't have to use the
24790 \begin_inset space ~
24795 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
24797 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
24800 \begin_layout Subsection
24802 \begin_inset Index idx
24805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24814 \begin_layout Standard
24815 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
24821 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
24827 \begin_inset space ~
24835 arg "math-insert \\space"
24839 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
24840 For example, the sequence
24845 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
24848 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
24850 \begin_inset Graphics
24851 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
24856 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
24857 the space marker and enter space again several times.
24858 With every space enter the size will be changed.
24859 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
24860 , because they are negative
24862 Here are two examples:
24865 \begin_layout Standard
24875 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
24881 \begin_layout Standard
24891 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
24897 \begin_layout Subsection
24899 \begin_inset Index idx
24902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24909 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24911 name "subsec:Functions"
24918 \begin_layout Standard
24922 \begin_inset space ~
24927 contains under the button
24930 arg "math-insert \\functions"
24933 a number of function macros, such as
24934 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
24938 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
24946 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
24953 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
24954 avoid confusions, because
24955 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
24959 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
24965 \begin_layout Standard
24966 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
24968 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
24972 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
24978 \begin_layout Standard
24979 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
24980 are placed, as described in section
24981 \begin_inset space ~
24985 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24987 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
24994 \begin_layout Subsection
24996 \begin_inset Index idx
24999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25008 \begin_layout Standard
25009 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
25011 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
25012 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
25013 commands, for example, to enter
25014 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
25017 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
25018 Our example is entered by typing
25023 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25030 \begin_inset space ~
25034 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25036 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
25040 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
25043 \begin_layout Standard
25044 \begin_inset Float table
25049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25050 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25053 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25055 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
25059 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
25067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25069 \begin_inset Tabular
25070 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
25071 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
25072 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25073 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25074 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25076 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25085 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25094 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25114 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25132 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25145 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25158 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
25168 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25186 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25199 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25212 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
25222 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25240 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25253 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25266 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
25276 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25294 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25307 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25320 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
25330 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25348 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25361 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25374 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
25384 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25402 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25415 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25428 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
25438 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25456 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25469 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25482 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
25492 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25510 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25523 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25536 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
25546 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25564 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25577 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25590 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
25600 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25609 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25622 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25635 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
25656 \begin_layout Standard
25657 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
25660 \begin_inset space ~
25668 arg "math-insert \\hat"
25671 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
25675 \begin_layout Section
25676 Brackets and Delimiters
25677 \begin_inset Index idx
25680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25687 \begin_inset Index idx
25690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25697 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25699 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
25706 \begin_layout Standard
25707 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
25709 For some purposes, using just the keys
25714 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
25715 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
25716 toolbar delimiter icon
25719 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
25723 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
25724 \begin_inset Formula
25726 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
25734 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
25735 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
25739 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
25742 and the expression on the right was entered using the
25748 \begin_inset Formula
25750 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
25758 \begin_layout Standard
25759 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
25760 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
25764 \begin_layout Standard
25765 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
25766 left side and right side.
25767 If you use the option
25770 \begin_inset space ~
25775 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
25776 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
25778 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
25783 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
25784 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
25787 \begin_layout Standard
25788 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
25789 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
25790 is to go inside the brackets.
25791 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
25796 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
25797 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
25798 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
25802 arg "math-delim ( )"
25808 \begin_layout Section
25809 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
25810 \begin_inset Index idx
25813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25820 \begin_inset Index idx
25823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25830 \begin_inset Index idx
25833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25834 Math ! Multi-line Equations
25842 \begin_layout Standard
25843 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
25847 \begin_inset space ~
25855 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
25859 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
25860 Here is an example:
25861 \begin_inset Formula
25863 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
25872 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
25873 \begin_inset space ~
25877 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25879 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
25884 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
25885 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
25886 This alignment is set in the box
25891 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25899 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25903 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25911 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25915 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25923 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25929 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25937 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25940 for every column as default.
25941 For example, the sequence
25942 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25950 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25953 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
25954 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
25955 corresponds to the relevant column.
25956 The result will look like this:
25957 \begin_inset Formula
25960 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
25961 column & has & has\,right\\
25962 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
25971 \begin_layout Standard
25972 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
25975 arg "newline-insert newline"
25978 while the cursor is in the matrix.
25979 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
25981 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25984 or the math toolbar.
25987 \begin_layout Standard
25988 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
25989 It can be created with the menu
25991 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25992 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25994 \begin_inset space ~
26006 Here is an example:
26007 \begin_inset Formula
26021 \begin_layout Standard
26022 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
26025 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
26028 arg "newline-insert newline"
26032 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
26037 arg "newline-insert newline"
26040 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
26041 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26045 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26048 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
26049 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
26050 A new row is created by every further entry of
26053 arg "newline-insert newline"
26057 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
26058 Here is an example:
26059 \begin_inset Formula
26061 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
26062 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
26067 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
26068 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
26069 \begin_inset Formula
26071 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
26079 \begin_layout Standard
26080 The multi-line formula type described here is called
26087 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
26088 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
26089 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26091 reference "eq:asquared"
26096 The other types are described in section
26097 \begin_inset space ~
26101 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26103 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
26110 \begin_layout Section
26111 Formula Numbering and Referencing
26112 \begin_inset Index idx
26115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26116 Math ! Formula numbering
26122 \begin_inset Index idx
26125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26126 Math ! Referencing formulas
26132 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26134 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
26141 \begin_layout Standard
26142 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
26144 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26145 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26147 \begin_inset space ~
26151 \begin_inset space ~
26159 arg "math-number-toggle"
26163 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26164 within parentheses.
26165 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
26166 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
26167 the document class.
26168 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
26169 separated by a dot:
26170 \begin_inset Formula
26180 arg "math-number-toggle"
26183 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
26184 You can only number displayed formulas.
26187 \begin_layout Standard
26188 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
26190 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26191 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26193 \begin_inset space ~
26197 \begin_inset space ~
26205 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
26208 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
26209 \begin_inset Formula
26212 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
26218 To number all lines use the shortcut
26221 arg "math-number-toggle"
26227 \begin_layout Standard
26228 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
26231 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
26232 A label is inserted with the menu
26234 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26243 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
26244 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
26245 It is recommended that you use the suggested
26246 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26254 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26257 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
26258 label type when you have many labels in your document.
26259 We inserted in the following example the label
26260 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26264 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26267 in the second line:
26268 \begin_inset Formula
26270 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
26271 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
26276 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
26277 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
26278 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
26280 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26282 \begin_inset space ~
26290 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
26294 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
26295 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26296 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
26297 as the formula number:
26300 \begin_layout Standard
26301 This is a cross-reference to equation (
26302 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26304 reference "eq:tanhExp"
26311 \begin_layout Standard
26312 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
26313 's cross-reference box are described in section
26314 \begin_inset space ~
26318 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26320 reference "sec:Cross-References"
26325 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
26333 \begin_layout Section
26334 User defined math macros
26335 \begin_inset Index idx
26338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26347 \begin_layout Standard
26349 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
26350 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
26351 Math macros are explained in section
26354 \begin_inset space ~
26366 \begin_layout Section
26370 \begin_layout Subsection
26372 \begin_inset Index idx
26375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26384 \begin_layout Standard
26385 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
26386 To set a font in a formula, use the
26389 \begin_inset space ~
26397 arg "math-insert \\font"
26400 , or enter its command, listed in table
26401 \begin_inset space ~
26405 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26407 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
26414 \begin_layout Standard
26415 \begin_inset Float table
26420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26421 \begin_inset Caption Standard
26423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26424 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26426 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
26430 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
26438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26440 \begin_inset Tabular
26441 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
26442 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
26443 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26444 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26446 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26455 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26466 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26476 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
26484 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26499 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26503 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
26511 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26526 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26530 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
26538 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26553 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26563 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
26571 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26586 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26590 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
26598 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26613 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26617 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
26625 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26640 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26651 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
26659 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26674 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26678 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
26686 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26712 \begin_layout Standard
26713 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26721 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
26737 \begin_layout Standard
26738 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
26739 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
26744 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
26745 space when you need a space in the box.
26746 Here is an example where
26747 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26751 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26758 denotes the set of numbers:
26759 \begin_inset Formula
26761 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
26769 \begin_layout Standard
26770 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
26771 You can, for example, put a character in
26780 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
26784 \begin_inset Newline newline
26787 So it is better not to use this feature.
26790 \begin_layout Standard
26791 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
26792 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
26796 \begin_inset Newline newline
26799 You can only print them emboldened using the command
26805 , which works like the other typeface commands:
26806 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
26812 \begin_layout Standard
26819 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
26822 \begin_layout Standard
26823 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
26825 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26826 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26828 \begin_inset space ~
26836 \begin_layout Subsection
26838 \begin_inset Index idx
26841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26850 \begin_layout Standard
26851 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
26853 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
26857 \begin_inset space ~
26861 \begin_inset space ~
26869 \begin_inset space ~
26877 arg "math-insert \\font"
26881 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26882 in black instead of blue.
26883 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
26884 Here is an example:
26885 \begin_inset Formula
26888 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
26889 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
26898 \begin_layout Subsection
26900 \begin_inset Index idx
26903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26912 \begin_layout Standard
26913 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
26914 automatically chosen in most situations.
26932 For most characters,
26940 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
26941 and certain other structures, are set larger in
26946 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
26947 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
26948 thinks are appropriate.
26949 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
26952 arg "math-insert \\style"
26956 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
26957 For example, you can set
26958 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
26961 , which is normally in
26970 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
26974 The four styles are used in the following example:
26977 \begin_layout Standard
26978 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
26982 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
26986 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
26990 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
26996 \begin_layout Standard
26997 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
26998 is set in a particular size with the menu
27000 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27002 \begin_inset space ~
27007 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
27008 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
27009 will be adjusted to correspond.
27010 As an example here is a formula in the font size
27011 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27015 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27021 \begin_layout Standard
27025 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
27031 \begin_layout Section
27032 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
27034 \begin_inset Index idx
27037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27044 \begin_inset Index idx
27047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27056 \begin_layout Standard
27058 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
27059 that are in common use.
27062 \begin_layout Subsection
27063 Enabling AMS-Support
27066 \begin_layout Standard
27067 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
27068 the document by selecting the checkbox
27071 \begin_inset space ~
27075 \begin_inset space ~
27079 \begin_inset space ~
27086 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27090 \begin_inset Index idx
27093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27094 Document ! Settings
27102 \begin_inset space ~
27108 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
27109 -errors in formulas,
27110 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
27113 \begin_layout Subsection
27115 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27117 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
27122 \begin_inset Index idx
27125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27126 Math ! Multi-line Equations
27134 \begin_layout Standard
27135 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
27136 provides a selection of different formula types.
27138 allows you to choose between
27159 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
27160 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27167 , for an explanation of these formula types.
27170 \begin_layout Chapter
27174 \begin_layout Section
27176 \begin_inset Index idx
27179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27186 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27188 name "sec:Cross-References"
27195 \begin_layout Standard
27196 One of \SpecialChar LyX
27197 's strengths is cross-references.
27198 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
27200 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
27201 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
27202 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
27205 \begin_layout Enumerate
27209 \begin_layout Enumerate
27210 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27212 name "enu:Second-item"
27219 \begin_layout Enumerate
27223 \begin_layout Standard
27224 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
27226 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27229 or by pressing the toolbar button
27236 A gray label box like this:
27237 \begin_inset Graphics
27238 filename clipart/label.png
27242 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
27244 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
27246 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27254 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27259 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27267 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27271 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27275 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27279 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
27280 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
27282 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27290 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27296 \begin_layout Standard
27297 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
27299 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27302 or the toolbar button
27305 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
27309 A gray cross-reference box like this:
27310 \begin_inset Graphics
27311 filename clipart/reference.png
27315 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
27317 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
27318 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27326 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27330 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
27334 \begin_layout Standard
27335 As an alternative to
27337 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27340 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
27345 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
27346 to the actual cursor position via the menu
27348 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27360 \begin_layout Standard
27361 Here is our cross-reference: Item
27362 \begin_inset space ~
27366 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27368 reference "enu:Second-item"
27375 \begin_layout Standard
27376 It is recommended to use a protected space
27380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27381 described in section
27382 \begin_inset space ~
27386 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27388 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
27397 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
27398 line breaks between them.
27401 \begin_layout Standard
27402 There are eight formats of cross-references:
27405 \begin_layout Description
27406 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
27407 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27409 reference "fig:Two-images"
27416 \begin_layout Description
27417 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
27418 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
27420 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27424 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27428 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27430 reference "eq:tanhExp"
27437 \begin_layout Description
27438 <page>: prints the page number: Page
27439 \begin_inset space ~
27443 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27444 LatexCommand pageref
27445 reference "fig:Two-images"
27452 \begin_layout Description
27454 \begin_inset space ~
27458 \begin_inset space ~
27461 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
27462 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27463 LatexCommand vpageref
27464 reference "fig:Two-images"
27469 \begin_inset Newline newline
27472 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
27473 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
27474 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
27475 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
27476 it prints “on the next page”.
27477 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
27480 \begin_layout Description
27482 \begin_inset space ~
27486 \begin_inset space ~
27490 \begin_inset space ~
27493 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
27494 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27496 reference "fig:Two-images"
27501 \begin_inset Newline newline
27504 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
27510 ; otherwise it behaves like
27514 \begin_inset space ~
27518 \begin_inset space ~
27527 \begin_layout Description
27529 \begin_inset space ~
27532 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
27533 \begin_inset Newline newline
27537 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
27540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27545 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27555 \begin_inset Index idx
27558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27560 packages ! prettyref
27566 \begin_inset Index idx
27569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27571 packages ! refstyle
27582 \begin_inset Newline newline
27585 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
27586 -package should be used for this feature by setting
27589 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
27593 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27594 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27602 is the default and preferred because
27606 supports only English documents.
27607 The format is specified by using the command
27619 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27620 preamble of the document.
27621 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
27623 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27631 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27639 \begin_inset Newline newline
27646 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
27651 \begin_inset Newline newline
27662 predefines reference formats for all available types.
27663 This is especially true for the wide variety of mathematical `theorem'
27665 So if you want to make formatted references to, say, Propositions, then
27666 you will need to define the relevant format yourself.
27671 , you might do so as follows:
27672 \begin_inset Newline newline
27679 newrefformat{prop}{Proposition
27684 \begin_inset Newline newline
27687 For more information about defining formatted references, have a look at
27688 the package documentation
27689 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27691 key "prettyref,refstyle"
27697 \begin_inset Newline newline
27708 will be available with formatted references only if you are using the
27715 \begin_layout Description
27717 \begin_inset space ~
27720 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
27721 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27722 LatexCommand nameref
27723 reference "fig:Two-images"
27730 \begin_layout Description
27732 \begin_inset space ~
27735 only: prints only the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27736 label for the reference:
27737 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27738 LatexCommand labelonly
27739 reference "fig:Two-images"
27744 \begin_inset Newline newline
27747 This allows for customization, using \SpecialChar TeX
27748 Code, if you want to issue a command
27749 that \SpecialChar LyX
27755 , then you may want to use the
27758 \begin_inset space ~
27763 option, which will output only the part of the reference following the
27765 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27769 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27773 This is the form needed for e.
27774 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27778 \begin_inset space \space{}
27785 's range commands.The number and current page of the referenced document
27786 part in the output is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
27788 The varieties are adjusted in the field
27792 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
27796 \begin_layout Standard
27797 You can only use the style
27801 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
27805 is always possible.
27808 \begin_layout Standard
27809 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
27810 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
27812 Referencing formulas is explained in section
27813 \begin_inset space ~
27817 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27819 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
27826 \begin_layout Standard
27827 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
27831 \begin_inset space ~
27835 \begin_inset space ~
27840 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
27841 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
27844 \begin_inset space ~
27849 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
27850 You can also go back with the toolbar button
27853 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
27859 \begin_layout Standard
27860 You can change labels at any time.
27861 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
27862 do not need to think about this.
27865 \begin_layout Standard
27866 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
27868 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
27872 \begin_layout Standard
27873 References are described in detail in the section
27874 \begin_inset space ~
27884 \begin_inset space ~
27892 \begin_layout Section
27893 Table of Contents and other Listings
27894 \begin_inset Index idx
27897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27904 \begin_inset Index idx
27907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27908 Navigating ! Outline
27914 \begin_inset Index idx
27917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27924 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27933 \begin_layout Subsection
27935 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27937 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
27944 \begin_layout Standard
27945 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
27947 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27948 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
27950 \begin_inset space ~
27954 \begin_inset space ~
27960 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
27962 If you click on it, the
27966 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
27967 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
27968 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
27970 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
27972 \begin_inset space ~
27977 that is described in section
27978 \begin_inset space ~
27982 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27984 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
27991 \begin_layout Standard
27992 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
27993 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
27995 \begin_inset space ~
27999 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28001 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
28005 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
28007 \begin_inset space ~
28011 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28013 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
28017 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
28019 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
28022 \begin_layout Subsection
28023 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
28024 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28026 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
28033 \begin_layout Standard
28034 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
28036 You can insert them via the
28038 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28042 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
28045 \begin_layout Section
28046 URLs and Hyperlinks
28047 \begin_inset Index idx
28050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28057 \begin_inset Index idx
28060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28069 \begin_layout Subsection
28071 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28080 \begin_layout Standard
28081 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
28083 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28089 \begin_layout Standard
28090 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
28092 \begin_inset Flex URL
28095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28097 https://www.lyx.org
28105 \begin_layout Standard
28106 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
28112 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
28116 \begin_layout Standard
28117 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28125 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
28134 \begin_layout Subsection
28136 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28138 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
28145 \begin_layout Standard
28146 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
28148 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28151 or with the toolbar button
28158 The appearing dialog has two fields:
28167 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
28168 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
28169 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28171 name "LyX's homepage"
28172 target "https://www.lyx.org"
28177 , an Email address like this:
28178 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28180 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
28181 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
28187 , or a link to a file.
28192 in the hyperlink settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
28200 \begin_layout Standard
28201 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
28203 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28211 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28214 to the link target.
28217 \begin_layout Standard
28218 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
28219 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
28220 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
28221 the text style dialog.
28222 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
28226 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28228 name "LyX's homepage"
28229 target "https://www.lyx.org"
28237 \begin_layout Standard
28238 The link text color can be changed, when the option
28242 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
28244 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28245 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28249 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
28251 \begin_inset Newline newline
28259 \begin_inset Newline newline
28266 in the PDF Properties dialog.
28269 \begin_layout Section
28271 \begin_inset Index idx
28274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28281 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28283 name "sec:Appendices"
28290 \begin_layout Standard
28291 Appendices are created with the menu
28293 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28295 \begin_inset space ~
28299 \begin_inset space ~
28305 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
28306 as the appendix part of the book.
28307 This part is marked with a red borderline.
28310 \begin_layout Standard
28311 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
28312 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
28313 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
28314 and the subsection number.
28315 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
28319 \begin_layout Standard
28321 \begin_inset space ~
28325 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28327 reference "chap:Credits"
28332 \begin_inset space ~
28336 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28338 reference "subsec:Export"
28345 \begin_layout Section
28347 \begin_inset Index idx
28350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28357 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28359 name "sec:Bibliography"
28366 \begin_layout Standard
28367 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
28369 You can include a bibliography database, which is explained in sec.
28370 \begin_inset space ~
28374 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28376 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
28383 , or you can insert the bibliography manually, using the paragraph environment
28388 , which is described in the following section (but see also sec.
28389 \begin_inset space ~
28393 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28395 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
28400 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
28401 this document, such as author-year citations, and if you have more than
28402 a handful of references, then you should seriously consider
28406 using a bibliography database.
28409 \begin_layout Standard
28410 In order to demonstrate the difference between these two approaches, we
28411 use two bibliographies in this document, a
28415 environment and a database-generated bibliography.
28416 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
28417 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
28418 In other words, the database approach relieves you, amongst other things,
28419 from the burden to check which entries you have actually cited.
28422 \begin_layout Subsection
28423 The Bibliography Environment
28424 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28426 name "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
28433 \begin_layout Standard
28438 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
28440 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
28449 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
28451 Each entry needs to be given a unique key, which is one word consisting
28452 of ASCII characters only.
28456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28458 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28461 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set"
28467 \begin_inset Newline newline
28471 \begin_inset Flex URL
28474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28476 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII
28488 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
28491 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28495 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28498 , a short form of its title, as the key.
28499 \begin_inset Newline newline
28506 for the entry, references to it will appear with this label instead of
28507 the number of the entry.
28512 in the bibliography items settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
28521 \begin_layout Standard
28522 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
28524 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28527 or the toolbar button
28530 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
28534 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
28535 containing the available citations.
28536 Select one or more keys from the list and
28546 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
28547 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
28551 \begin_layout Standard
28552 Citation references appear in the output as the number or the label of the
28553 bibliography entry with surrounding brackets.
28554 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
28556 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28560 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28566 \begin_layout Standard
28570 Companion Second Edition
28573 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28575 key "latexcompanion"
28583 \begin_layout Standard
28584 The \SpecialChar LyX
28585 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
28586 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28596 \begin_layout Standard
28597 You can also produce author-year or author-number citations, using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28604 \begin_inset Index idx
28607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28615 In order to do so, the label needs to be given the form
28616 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28620 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28624 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28627 Author A and Author B(Year)
28628 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28635 a blank between the author(s) and the opening parenthesis that delimits
28637 Then, if you select
28640 \begin_inset space ~
28645 in the document settings
28646 \begin_inset Index idx
28649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28650 Document ! Settings
28657 Bibliography\SpecialChar menuseparator
28659 \begin_inset space ~
28665 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28667 reference "subsec:Citation-Format"
28674 ), you can select between different author-year or author-number styles.
28677 \begin_layout Standard
28678 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
28681 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28683 \begin_inset space ~
28691 arg "layout-paragraph"
28695 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
28698 \begin_layout Subsection
28699 Bibliography databases
28700 \begin_inset Index idx
28703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28704 Bibliography ! Databases
28710 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28712 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
28719 \begin_layout Standard
28720 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same references in different
28725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28726 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
28728 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
28729 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
28734 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
28736 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
28737 your working field in a database.
28738 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
28739 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
28740 list for that document.
28741 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
28745 \begin_layout Standard
28746 The database is a text file with the file extension
28747 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28755 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28758 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
28759 The format is explained in
28760 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28767 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28769 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28771 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
28777 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
28778 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
28779 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
28781 \begin_inset Flex URL
28784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28786 https://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
28794 \begin_layout Standard
28796 supports two different approaches to use bibliography databases in a document.
28797 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28798 is the classic technique that has been the only way to use such databases
28800 It is quite established and mature and there is a huge range of existing
28802 But it has its drawbacks, especially when it comes to more complex bibliographi
28803 c needs and support for specific languages and scripts.
28804 Those are addressed by
28809 \begin_inset Index idx
28812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28814 packages ! biblatex
28820 It reads the same database format than Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28821 (although it has been significantly
28822 extended beyond Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28832 can handle any classic Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28833 database, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28834 might conversely fail to correctly
28835 handle databases that use specific
28844 , but it uses a different framework to generate citations and references
28848 \begin_layout Standard
28849 To select if Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28854 should be used, set in the document settings (menu
28856 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28860 \begin_inset Index idx
28863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28864 Document ! Settings
28876 \begin_inset space ~
28881 to a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28889 \begin_layout Subsubsection
28890 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28892 \begin_inset Index idx
28895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28896 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28905 \begin_layout Standard
28906 To access a database via Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28909 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28914 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
28916 \begin_inset space ~
28922 A window will appear in which you can add one or more databases and select
28923 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28931 Add bibliography to TOC
28933 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
28938 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
28939 in the document or just the cited references.
28942 \begin_layout Standard
28943 The Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28944 style file is a text file with the file extension
28945 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28953 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28956 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
28957 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
28958 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
28959 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
28961 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
28966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28967 For information on how this is done, have a look at
28968 \begin_inset Newline newline
28972 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28974 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
28984 In this document we used the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28989 , which provides an alpha-numeric style in accordance with the German Standards
28993 \begin_layout Standard
28994 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
28997 \begin_layout Subsubsection
28999 \begin_inset Index idx
29002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29003 Bibliography ! Biblatex
29009 \begin_inset Index idx
29012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29014 packages ! biblatex
29022 \begin_layout Standard
29023 Accessing a database via
29027 is almost identical to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29030 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29035 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
29037 \begin_inset space ~
29043 In contrary to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29044 you cannot select a
29049 The other dialog options are the same as with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29053 \begin_layout Standard
29058 has two different style files: a bibliography style file (text file with
29060 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29068 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29071 ) controls how the bibliography entries will look like and a citation style
29072 file (text file with the file extension
29073 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29081 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29084 ) controls the look of the citation references in the text.
29085 Usually such style files come in pairs and it makes sense to use matching
29087 It is nevertheless possible to mix any citation style with any bibliography
29091 \begin_layout Standard
29096 styles are not set in the
29099 \begin_inset space ~
29104 dialog, but in the document settings.
29105 \begin_inset Index idx
29108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29109 Document ! Settings
29114 However, in the dialog in the
29118 field, which is only visible if you use
29122 , you can enter options that determine how the bibliography is printed (for
29123 example how its heading will appear).
29124 These options are deescribed in detail in the
29129 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29139 \begin_layout Standard
29140 Inserting a citation reference works as described in section
29141 \begin_inset space ~
29145 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29147 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
29157 \begin_layout Subsubsection
29158 Bibliography Processors
29161 \begin_layout Standard
29162 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
29163 uses a bibliography processor,
29164 that is an external program that reads the database, sorts the citations
29165 and processes the data in a way it can be included in the document.
29166 The classic program is called Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29168 It has the advantage that it is very mature and widespread, but the disadvantag
29169 e that it has severe limitations, due to its age.
29172 \begin_layout Standard
29173 Meanwhile, some alternatives have been developed that address some of these
29175 LyX natively supports some of them and lets you select a custom processor.
29176 You can do this on a general level in
29178 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
29179 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
29180 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
29183 or for individual documents in
29185 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29186 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29190 The following variants are available by default:
29193 \begin_layout Description
29194 biber a specific, modern processor
29195 \begin_inset Index idx
29198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29205 developed exclusively for
29209 (it does not work with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29215 provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory and many specific features
29220 makes use of; if you use the
29224 approach, it is strongly recommended to use
29231 \begin_layout Description
29232 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
29233 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
29234 with all bibliography packages, although it will probably fail with
29238 bibliographies due to the limited memory.
29241 \begin_layout Description
29242 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding
29243 (but no Unicode support), larger memory than
29247 , works with all bibliography packages, although more complex
29251 bibliographies will exceed its limits, and not all
29255 features are supported.
29258 \begin_layout Standard
29259 By default (with the
29265 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29266 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29279 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
29280 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
29281 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
29284 ), \SpecialChar LyX
29285 selects an appropriate (available) processor for the current bibliography
29298 for Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29299 -based bibliography styles).
29300 This should suit most needs.
29303 \begin_layout Standard
29304 In Japanese documents, a specific processor is used.
29305 By default this is pBib\SpecialChar TeX
29306 (in \SpecialChar LyX
29311 ), a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29312 variant specifically aimed at Japanese.
29313 You can adjust it in
29315 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
29316 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
29317 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
29323 \begin_layout Standard
29324 Selected bibliography processors can be controlled with options that you
29325 can add below the selection.
29326 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
29327 of Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29333 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29343 \begin_layout Subsubsection
29347 \begin_layout Standard
29349 supports some specific tasks such as sectioned bibliographies and multiple
29351 These are explained in detail in section
29353 Customizing Bibliographies
29357 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29362 Additional Features
29367 \begin_layout Subsection
29369 \begin_inset Index idx
29372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29373 Bibliography ! Citation format
29379 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29381 name "subsec:Citation-Format"
29388 \begin_layout Standard
29389 Many different citation formats are common, e.
29390 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29394 \begin_inset space \space{}
29397 numerical citation (as
29398 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29402 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29405 like in this document), alpha-numerical citations (as
29406 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29410 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29413 ) or author-year citations (as
29414 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29418 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29423 supports these formats via specific citation packages and their style
29427 \begin_layout Standard
29428 By default a simple numeric citation style is used.
29431 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29432 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29436 \begin_inset Index idx
29439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29440 Document ! Settings
29445 you have a range of other options, depending on your preferred bibliography
29451 environment your only choice besides manual formatting of the bibliography
29452 labels, is there to use
29455 \begin_inset space ~
29466 \begin_inset space ~
29471 which gives you author-year and author-numerical citations (see above
29472 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29474 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
29481 \begin_layout Standard
29482 With a bibliography database (see
29483 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29485 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
29492 ) one has in contrary to the
29496 environment full access to the formatting styles.
29497 These style formats are available:
29500 \begin_layout Description
29502 \begin_inset space ~
29505 (BibTeX) the default Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29506 -based approached without any additional packages
29507 (simple numeric citations).
29510 \begin_layout Description
29511 Biblatex loads the package
29516 \begin_inset Index idx
29519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29521 packages ! biblatex
29526 and lets you select a style in the dropdown boxes
29528 Biblatex citation style
29532 Biblatex bibliography style
29535 Options to the package
29539 can be entered in the
29546 \begin_layout Description
29548 \begin_inset space ~
29552 \begin_inset space ~
29555 mode) loads the package
29559 with the natbib compatibility mode.
29560 This is a specific variant for users who switch an existing document that
29572 behavior very closely.
29577 this option has some additional styles.
29582 styles are also supported by this variant.
29585 \begin_layout Description
29587 \begin_inset space ~
29590 (BibTeX) loads the package
29595 \begin_inset Index idx
29598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29605 which provides author-year styles particularly suited for law studies.
29608 \begin_layout Description
29610 \begin_inset space ~
29613 (BibTeX) loads the package
29618 \begin_inset Index idx
29621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29628 which provides citation styles particularly suited for the humanities.
29631 \begin_layout Standard
29640 style formats provide the choice between author-year and author-numerical
29642 You have to select one style in the dropdown box
29651 formats, this only affects the appearance in the \SpecialChar LyX
29653 Whether the output uses numerical, author-year or another format such as
29654 alpha-numerical depends only on the selected
29656 Biblatex citation style
29659 However, when switching between Author-year and Author-number, a suitable
29665 , on the other hand, the dialog selection will ultimately determine the
29669 \begin_layout Standard
29670 For any author-year and author-numerical selection, multiple style variants
29671 are available in the
29676 Some selections also provide further options like the option to uppercase
29677 a name prefix such as
29678 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29682 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29686 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29690 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29693 ) or to expand or reduce the number of displayed others (i.
29694 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29698 \begin_inset space \space{}
29702 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29706 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29713 \begin_layout Standard
29714 In the citation dialog you can also set text to appear after a citation
29716 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29720 \begin_inset space \space{}
29723 page numbers, which will then be formatted according to the style's needs
29725 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29729 \begin_inset space \space{}
29733 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29737 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29745 in the citation dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
29749 \begin_inset space ~
29757 \begin_inset space ~
29763 Here is a simple example where the text
29764 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29768 \begin_inset space ~
29772 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29775 appears after the reference:
29778 \begin_layout Quote
29780 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29783 key "latexcompanion"
29791 \begin_layout Standard
29792 All styles except for
29796 also provide the feature to add text that precedes the reference (such
29798 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29802 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29806 This text is then also included in the parentheses, if the style requires
29810 \begin_layout Standard
29811 Note that these pre- and postnotes apply to the whole citation.
29812 So if you refer to multiple references at once, the prenote will precede
29813 the first citation in the list, the postnote will follow the last.
29818 styles allow to add pre- and postnotes to any individual reference in a
29819 multi-citation (so-called
29820 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29823 qualified citation lists
29824 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29830 If you use such a style and if the current reference includes multiple
29835 dialog will display three columns in the field
29842 \begin_inset space ~
29850 \begin_inset space ~
29858 \begin_inset space ~
29864 If you double-click on an item's
29867 \begin_inset space ~
29875 \begin_inset space ~
29880 field, you can add such individual pre- and postnotes.
29883 General text before
29889 fields you can add pre- and postnotes that apply to the whole list.
29892 \begin_layout Section
29894 \begin_inset Index idx
29897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29904 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29913 \begin_layout Standard
29914 An index entry is created if you use the menu
29916 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29918 \begin_inset space ~
29923 or the toolbar button
29930 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
29931 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
29932 by \SpecialChar LyX
29933 as the index entry.
29936 \begin_layout Standard
29937 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
29939 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29940 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
29942 \begin_inset space ~
29948 A light blue box labeled
29949 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29957 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29960 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
29961 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
29965 \begin_layout Standard
29966 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
29967 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
29968 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
29969 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29971 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29973 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
29981 \begin_layout Subsection
29982 Grouping Index Entries
29983 \begin_inset Index idx
29986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29995 \begin_layout Standard
29996 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
29998 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
29999 lists under the entry
30000 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30004 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30008 First we create the entry
30009 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30013 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30017 \begin_inset space ~
30021 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30023 reference "subsec:Lists"
30028 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
30029 \begin_inset space ~
30033 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30035 reference "sec:Itemize"
30039 , we insert the command
30042 \begin_layout Standard
30048 \begin_layout Standard
30052 \begin_layout Standard
30058 \begin_layout Standard
30059 for the enumerated list in section
30060 \begin_inset space ~
30064 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30066 reference "sec:Enumerate"
30073 \begin_layout Standard
30074 The exclamation mark
30075 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30079 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30082 marks the grouping levels.
30083 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
30084 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
30085 If we don't have an index entry for
30086 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30090 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30093 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
30096 \begin_layout Subsection
30098 \begin_inset Index idx
30101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30102 Index ! Page ranges
30110 \begin_layout Standard
30111 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
30113 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
30114 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
30115 an index entry in section
30116 \begin_inset space ~
30120 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30122 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
30129 \begin_layout Standard
30132 Paragraph environments|(
30135 \begin_layout Standard
30136 and another entry at the end of section
30137 \begin_inset space ~
30141 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30143 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
30150 \begin_layout Standard
30153 Paragraph environments|)
30156 \begin_layout Standard
30158 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30166 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30170 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30178 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30181 respectively start and end the index range.
30182 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
30183 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
30184 the pages of the indexed document parts.
30185 An example is the index entry
30186 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30189 Document ! Settings
30190 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30196 \begin_layout Subsection
30198 \begin_inset Index idx
30201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30202 Index ! Cross referencing
30210 \begin_layout Standard
30211 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
30212 We referred for example in the index entry
30213 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30217 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30221 \begin_inset space ~
30225 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30227 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
30231 ) to the index entry
30232 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30236 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30239 in the same section using the entry
30242 \begin_layout Standard
30245 GIF|see{Image formats}
30248 \begin_layout Standard
30249 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
30251 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
30252 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
30255 \begin_layout Subsection
30257 \begin_inset Index idx
30260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30261 Index ! Entry order
30269 \begin_layout Standard
30270 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
30271 follow the rules for the index order.
30272 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
30277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30278 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
30280 \begin_inset space ~
30284 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30286 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
30295 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
30296 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
30297 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30301 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30305 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30309 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30313 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30317 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30321 \begin_inset Index idx
30324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30325 Dummy entries ! maïs
30331 \begin_inset Index idx
30334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30335 Dummy entries ! maître
30341 \begin_inset Index idx
30344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30345 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
30350 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
30351 maïs, maison, maître.
30352 To achieve this, we use the command
30355 \begin_layout Standard
30358 previous entry@current entry
30361 \begin_layout Standard
30362 In our case we want to have
30363 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30367 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30371 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30375 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30378 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
30381 \begin_layout Standard
30387 \begin_layout Standard
30388 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
30389 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
30391 See the next subsection for an example.
30394 \begin_layout Subsection
30396 \begin_inset Index idx
30399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30400 Index ! Entry layout
30408 \begin_layout Standard
30409 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
30410 \begin_inset Index idx
30413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30416 This is an italic dummy entry
30421 You can also format the page number using the character
30422 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30426 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30429 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30430 -command without a backslash.
30431 We can write for example
30434 \begin_layout Standard
30437 italic page number:|textit
30440 \begin_layout Standard
30441 to get the page number in italic.
30442 \begin_inset Index idx
30445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30446 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
30451 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
30452 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
30454 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30462 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30470 \begin_inset space ~
30476 Have a look at section
30477 \begin_inset space ~
30481 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30483 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
30487 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30491 \begin_layout Standard
30492 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30500 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
30504 to generate the index, see section
30505 \begin_inset space ~
30509 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30511 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
30520 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
30525 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
30526 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30529 key "latexcompanion"
30542 \begin_layout Standard
30543 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
30545 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
30546 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
30547 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
30548 If so, put the following in the preamble
30551 \begin_layout Standard
30563 \begin_layout Standard
30567 \begin_layout Standard
30573 \begin_layout Standard
30574 in the index entry.
30575 \begin_inset Index idx
30578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30579 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
30584 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
30585 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
30586 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
30589 \begin_layout Standard
30590 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
30591 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
30592 a bold font for all index entries.
30593 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
30605 documentation for details,
30606 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30608 key "makeindex,xindy"
30616 \begin_layout Subsection
30618 \begin_inset Index idx
30621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30628 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30630 name "subsec:Index-Program"
30637 \begin_layout Standard
30638 If the index generation program
30642 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
30643 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
30647 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
30648 distribution, is used.
30652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30657 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
30658 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
30659 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
30660 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
30661 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
30671 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
30673 dialog, see section
30674 \begin_inset space ~
30678 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30680 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
30685 The available options are listed and explained in
30686 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30688 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
30694 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
30698 \begin_layout Standard
30699 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
30700 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
30703 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30704 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30708 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
30709 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
30712 \begin_layout Subsection
30716 \begin_layout Standard
30717 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
30718 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
30719 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30723 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30726 next to the standard index.
30728 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
30729 that add this feature.
30736 \begin_inset Index idx
30739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30741 packages ! splitidx
30746 package to generate multiple indexes.
30747 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
30752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30753 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
30755 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30763 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30764 style, but it also includes
30765 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
30766 Please consult the package's manual for details.
30774 \begin_layout Standard
30775 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
30776 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
30778 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30779 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30782 and select the option
30784 Use multiple Indexes
30791 already contains the standard index
30792 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30796 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30800 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
30801 also appear as a heading) to the
30805 input field and press the
30810 The new index now also appears in the list.
30811 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
30812 label color to the new index.
30815 \begin_layout Standard
30816 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
30819 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30826 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
30827 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
30828 are additional features:
30831 \begin_layout Itemize
30832 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
30833 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
30836 \begin_layout Itemize
30837 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
30838 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
30843 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
30844 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
30845 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
30846 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
30849 \begin_layout Itemize
30854 allows to use \SpecialChar TeX
30855 code in the name of the index.
30858 \begin_layout Section
30859 Nomenclature/Glossary
30860 \begin_inset Index idx
30863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30870 \begin_inset Index idx
30873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30902 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30904 name "sec:Nomenclature"
30911 \begin_layout Standard
30912 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
30913 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
30914 called nomenclature or glossary.
30917 \begin_layout Standard
30918 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30925 \begin_inset Index idx
30928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30936 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
30938 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30945 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
30949 \begin_layout Standard
30950 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
30951 and then use the menu
30953 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30959 \begin_inset space ~
30964 or the toolbar button
30967 arg "nomencl-insert"
30972 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30980 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30983 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
30986 \begin_layout Standard
30987 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
30988 The first is the term or
30992 that you wish to define.
30997 of the term or symbol.
31000 \begin_layout Standard
31001 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31009 To use \SpecialChar TeX
31010 code for nomenclature entries the option
31014 in the nomenclature dialog has to be used.
31022 \begin_layout Subsection
31023 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
31024 \begin_inset Index idx
31027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31028 Nomenclature ! Layout
31036 \begin_layout Standard
31037 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
31041 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
31044 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31048 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31052 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31056 \begin_inset Newline newline
31064 \begin_inset Newline newline
31070 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31074 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31077 character starts/ends the formula.
31078 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
31079 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
31081 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31087 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31091 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
31101 \begin_layout Standard
31102 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31103 syntax is given in section
31104 \begin_inset space ~
31108 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31110 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
31117 \begin_layout Standard
31121 \begin_inset space ~
31126 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
31128 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
31129 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31133 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31137 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31140 in this document is:
31141 \begin_inset Newline newline
31146 dummy entry for the character
31151 \begin_inset Newline newline
31163 \begin_inset space ~
31173 font use the command
31202 \begin_layout Standard
31203 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
31204 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31208 \begin_inset space \space{}
31212 \begin_inset Newline newline
31228 \begin_inset Newline newline
31231 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
31232 This command will make the font of all symbols
31239 \begin_inset space ~
31247 \begin_layout Standard
31248 If the characters |
31249 \begin_inset space \space{}
31253 \begin_inset space \space{}
31257 \begin_inset space \space{}
31261 \begin_inset space \space{}
31265 \begin_inset space \space{}
31268 should appear in nomenclature entries containing \SpecialChar TeX
31269 code they need to be escaped
31270 by adding a quote character in front of them.
31271 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
31272 LatexCommand nomenclature
31273 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
31274 description "The quote sign in TeX code is output by writing ' \"\" '."
31282 \begin_layout Subsection
31283 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
31284 \begin_inset Index idx
31287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31288 Nomenclature ! Sort order
31296 \begin_layout Standard
31297 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31298 -code of the symbol
31300 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
31302 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
31305 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
31306 LatexCommand nomenclature
31308 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
31316 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31320 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
31321 LatexCommand nomenclature
31324 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
31330 They will be sorted by
31331 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31339 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31343 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31353 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31357 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31360 will be sorted before the
31364 since the character
31365 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31369 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31372 is considered in sorting.
31375 \begin_layout Standard
31376 To control the sort order, you can edit the
31379 \begin_inset space ~
31384 field of the nomenclature dialog.
31385 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
31387 For the example given, you can insert
31391 in this field for the
31392 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31399 will be located before
31400 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31406 \begin_layout Standard
31407 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
31412 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31422 \begin_layout Subsection
31423 Nomenclature Options
31424 \begin_inset Index idx
31427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31428 Nomenclature ! Options
31434 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31436 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
31443 \begin_layout Standard
31448 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
31449 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
31452 \begin_layout Description
31453 refeq Appends the phrase
31454 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31466 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31469 to every nomenclature entry, where
31475 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
31478 \begin_layout Description
31479 refpage Appends the phrase
31480 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31492 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31495 to every nomenclature entry, where
31501 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
31504 \begin_layout Description
31505 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
31508 \begin_layout Standard
31509 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
31510 class options list in the
31512 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31516 In this document the options
31523 \begin_layout Standard
31524 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
31530 \begin_layout Standard
31531 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
31532 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
31537 field in the nomenclature dialog:
31540 \begin_layout Description
31550 \begin_layout Description
31553 nomrefpage Like the
31560 \begin_layout Description
31563 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
31572 \begin_layout Description
31576 \begin_inset space ~
31582 \begin_inset space ~
31587 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
31590 \begin_layout Standard
31592 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31596 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31599 are automatically translated for most document languages.
31600 If not, add these lines in front of the nomenclature list as \SpecialChar TeX
31604 \begin_layout Standard
31613 \begin_inset Newline newline
31619 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
31622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31623 \begin_inset space ~
31635 unskip, see equation
31638 \begin_inset Newline newline
31645 pagedeclaration}[1]{
31646 \begin_inset Newline newline
31652 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
31655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31656 \begin_inset space ~
31673 \begin_layout Standard
31674 If the numbers should be hyperlinks, assure that you use
31677 \begin_inset space ~
31682 in the document settings under
31685 \begin_inset space ~
31693 \begin_layout Standard
31701 \begin_inset Newline newline
31705 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
31708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31709 \begin_inset space ~
31721 hyperlink{equation.#1}{equation
31723 nobreakspace{}(#1)}}
31724 \begin_inset Newline newline
31731 pagedeclaration}[1]{
31732 \begin_inset Newline newline
31736 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
31739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31740 \begin_inset space ~
31752 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
31757 \begin_layout Subsection
31758 Printing the Nomenclature
31759 \begin_inset Index idx
31762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31763 Nomenclature ! Printing
31771 \begin_layout Standard
31772 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
31774 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31775 Lists/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
31780 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31788 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31791 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
31792 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
31793 You can choose between these settings:
31796 \begin_layout Description
31797 Default a space of 1
31798 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31804 \begin_layout Description
31806 \begin_inset space ~
31810 \begin_inset space ~
31813 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
31816 \begin_layout Description
31817 Custom custom space
31820 \begin_layout Standard
31821 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
31822 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31826 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31830 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
31838 For example, in order to change the name to
31842 , add the following line to the preamble:
31845 \begin_layout Standard
31853 nomname}{List of Symbols}
31856 \begin_layout Subsection
31857 Nomenclature Program
31858 \begin_inset Index idx
31861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31862 Nomenclature ! Program
31868 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31870 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
31877 \begin_layout Standard
31883 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
31884 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
31886 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
31891 by adding options, see section
31892 \begin_inset space ~
31896 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31898 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
31903 The available options are listed and explained in
31904 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31906 key "nomencl,makeindex"
31914 \begin_layout Section
31916 \begin_inset Index idx
31919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31926 \begin_inset Index idx
31929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31930 Document ! Branches
31936 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31938 name "sec:Branches"
31945 \begin_layout Standard
31946 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
31947 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
31948 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
31949 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
31952 \begin_layout Standard
31953 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
31954 allows you to put text into branches.
31955 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
31956 To create a branch, either select the menu
31958 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31959 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
31962 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
31964 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31971 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
31972 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
31973 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
31974 and whether the name of the branch should
31975 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
31976 (see below for an example).
31977 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
31978 to the name of the other) and to add
31979 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31983 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31987 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31991 \begin_inset space ~
31994 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
31995 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
31998 \begin_layout Standard
31999 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
32000 These boxes are inserted via the menu
32002 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32005 where you can choose a branch.
32006 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
32010 \begin_layout Standard
32011 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
32012 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
32015 \begin_layout Standard
32016 \begin_inset Branch Question
32020 \begin_layout Standard
32025 Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
32033 \begin_layout Standard
32034 \begin_inset Branch Answer
32038 \begin_layout Standard
32043 Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
32051 \begin_layout Standard
32058 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32059 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32062 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
32063 Consider for example a file
32064 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32068 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32071 which has the above branches.
32073 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32077 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32080 is active, the PDF export file would be called
32081 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32085 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32089 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32093 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32097 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32101 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32104 branch were inactive,
32105 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32109 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32113 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32117 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32120 branch was active, likewise
32121 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32125 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32129 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32133 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32136 branch was active, and
32137 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32140 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
32141 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32144 if both branches were active.
32145 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
32146 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
32152 \begin_layout Standard
32153 There are also inverted branch insets, whose content is output just in case
32159 This make it easy to add alternative text for different versions of a document.
32160 To control whether a particular inset is inverted, right-click on the inset
32164 \begin_inset space ~
32172 \begin_layout Standard
32173 \begin_inset Branch Answer
32177 \begin_layout Standard
32183 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32187 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32190 branch is deactivated.
32196 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
32202 \begin_layout Standard
32203 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
32204 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
32205 definitions for each branch.
32206 For example you can define for the question branch
32210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32211 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32212 -syntax, see section
32213 \begin_inset space ~
32217 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32219 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
32231 \begin_layout Standard
32241 \begin_layout Standard
32251 \begin_layout Standard
32252 and for the answer branch
32255 \begin_layout Standard
32265 \begin_layout Standard
32275 \begin_layout Standard
32276 \begin_inset Branch Question
32280 \begin_layout Standard
32284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32312 \begin_layout Standard
32313 \begin_inset Branch Answer
32317 \begin_layout Standard
32321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32349 \begin_layout Standard
32350 Now it is possible to use the
32354 question{\SpecialChar ldots
32361 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
32364 commands to obtain conditional output.
32365 Here is an example formula where only the
32372 \begin_inset Formula
32374 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
32382 \begin_layout Standard
32383 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
32391 \begin_layout Standard
32392 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
32394 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32398 \begin_inset space \space{}
32401 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
32403 For this advanced usage, see the
32409 Flex insets and InsetLayout
32414 \begin_layout Section
32416 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32418 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
32423 \begin_inset Index idx
32426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32435 \begin_layout Standard
32438 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32439 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32442 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
32444 All these options are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32450 \begin_inset Index idx
32453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32455 packages ! hyperref
32460 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
32461 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
32462 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
32463 part of the document.
32467 \begin_layout Standard
32468 The header information in the dialog tab
32472 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
32473 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
32474 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
32475 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
32479 \begin_inset space ~
32483 \begin_inset space ~
32488 is set, \SpecialChar LyX
32489 tries to extract the header information from your document title
32490 and author entries.
32494 \begin_inset space ~
32498 \begin_inset space ~
32502 \begin_inset space ~
32507 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
32510 \begin_layout Standard
32511 You can specify in the dialog tab
32515 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
32520 \begin_inset space ~
32524 \begin_inset space ~
32528 \begin_inset space ~
32533 option allows long links to be split;
32536 \begin_inset space ~
32540 \begin_inset space ~
32544 \begin_inset space ~
32552 \begin_inset space ~
32557 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
32560 \begin_inset space ~
32565 colors the different links.
32566 The default colors are:
32569 \begin_layout Labeling
32570 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
32575 for hyperlinks and URLs
32578 \begin_layout Labeling
32579 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
32587 \begin_layout Labeling
32588 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
32596 \begin_layout Standard
32597 but you can change these in the field
32602 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
32605 \begin_layout Standard
32608 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
32611 \begin_layout Standard
32616 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
32617 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
32618 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
32621 \begin_layout Standard
32626 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
32627 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
32628 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
32638 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
32639 when opening the PDF.
32641 \begin_inset space ~
32644 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
32645 \begin_inset space ~
32648 1 will only display the sections.
32651 \begin_layout Standard
32652 PDF properties are also used in this document.
32653 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
32659 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
32660 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32670 \begin_layout Section
32672 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32674 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32676 name "sec:TeX-Code"
32683 \begin_layout Subsection
32686 \begin_inset Index idx
32689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32697 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32699 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
32706 \begin_layout Standard
32707 As \SpecialChar LyX
32708 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
32709 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
32710 commands and constructs,
32713 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
32714 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
32715 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
32716 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
32717 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
32718 cannot support all packages and
32722 \begin_layout Standard
32723 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
32724 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
32725 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
32729 Code box is created by the menu
32731 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32733 \begin_inset space ~
32738 or by the toolbar button
32751 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
32759 \begin_layout Standard
32760 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
32762 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
32764 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word
32768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32769 The LyX way would be to use a framed box.
32774 and are therefore using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32781 , you can write the command part
32787 in a \SpecialChar TeX
32788 Code box before the word and the closing brace
32792 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
32793 Code box behind the word.
32794 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
32795 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
32799 \begin_layout Standard
32800 \begin_inset Graphics
32801 filename clipart/ERT.png
32809 \begin_layout Standard
32813 \begin_layout Standard
32814 This is a line with a
32818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32841 \begin_layout Standard
32842 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32850 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
32851 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
32852 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
32853 know that the command is finished.
32861 \begin_layout Subsection
32862 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32864 \begin_inset Argument 1
32867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32868 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
32875 \begin_inset Index idx
32878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32886 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32888 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
32895 \begin_layout Standard
32896 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
32897 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32898 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
32899 uses in the background.
32900 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
32901 is based on commands, you can
32902 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32906 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32910 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
32911 any time if you know the right commands.
32912 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
32913 is the end of the day.
32914 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
32915 all caption labels bold.
32916 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
32918 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
32922 \begin_layout Standard
32923 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
32925 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
32927 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32930 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32940 \begin_layout Standard
32941 As result you find that the package
32946 \begin_inset Index idx
32949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32957 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
32959 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32962 \SpecialChar menuseparator
32966 \begin_inset space ~
32974 \begin_layout Standard
32979 usepackage[options]{package name}
32982 \begin_layout Standard
32983 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
32984 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
32985 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
32986 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
32989 \begin_layout Standard
32990 In your case the package name is
32995 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
33000 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
33001 So you add the command
33004 \begin_layout Standard
33009 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
33012 \begin_layout Standard
33013 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
33017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33018 For more commands provided by the
33022 package, have a look at its documentation,
33023 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33038 \begin_layout Standard
33039 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
33041 For example if you use a
33045 class, you don't need the package
33049 , you can instead write
33052 \begin_layout Standard
33057 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
33062 \begin_layout Standard
33063 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
33064 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
33065 documentation of the document class you want to use.
33072 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
33075 \begin_layout Standard
33076 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
33077 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
33079 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
33080 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
33081 Code box as described in the previous
33085 \begin_layout Standard
33086 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
33087 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33090 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33092 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
33100 \begin_layout Standard
33101 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
33107 \begin_layout Standard
33111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33121 \begin_inset Note Note
33124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33125 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
33133 \begin_layout Left Header
33134 \begin_inset Argument 1
33137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33157 \begin_inset Note Note
33160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33161 defines the header line as described below
33169 \begin_layout Center Header
33170 \begin_inset Argument 1
33173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33182 \begin_layout Right Header
33183 \begin_inset Argument 1
33186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33207 \begin_layout Left Footer
33208 \begin_inset Argument 1
33211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33232 \begin_layout Center Footer
33233 \begin_inset Argument 1
33236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33248 \begin_inset Newline newline
33252 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
33258 \begin_layout Right Footer
33259 \begin_inset Argument 1
33262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33284 \begin_layout Section
33285 Customized Page Headers and Footers
33286 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33288 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
33293 \begin_inset Index idx
33296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33297 Document ! Header/Footer line
33303 \begin_inset Index idx
33306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33315 \begin_layout Standard
33316 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
33320 \begin_inset space ~
33331 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33337 \begin_inset space ~
33343 As a second step add in the menu
33345 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33346 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33350 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33355 Custom Header/Footerlines
33358 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33362 This module offers the following 6
33363 \begin_inset space ~
33369 \begin_layout Description
33371 \begin_inset space ~
33375 \begin_inset space ~
33379 \begin_inset space ~
33383 \begin_inset space ~
33387 \begin_inset space ~
33393 \begin_layout Description
33395 \begin_inset space ~
33399 \begin_inset space ~
33403 \begin_inset space ~
33407 \begin_inset space ~
33411 \begin_inset space ~
33417 \begin_layout Standard
33418 for the different positions in the header/footer.
33419 These environments can be selected in the environment pull-down box.
33422 \begin_layout Standard
33423 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
33424 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
33426 \begin_inset space ~
33430 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33432 reference "fig:Page-layout"
33436 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
33439 \begin_layout Standard
33440 \begin_inset Float figure
33446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33449 \begin_inset Tabular
33450 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
33451 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
33452 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
33453 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
33454 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
33456 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33465 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
33468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33474 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33485 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33494 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33503 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33514 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
33517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33518 The normal text on the page goes here.
33519 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
33521 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
33522 the chapter, company logo but you can use almost anything, except of floats.
33527 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33536 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33547 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33556 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33565 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33576 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33585 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
33588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33594 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33612 \begin_inset Caption Standard
33614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33615 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33617 name "fig:Page-layout"
33621 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
33634 \begin_layout Standard
33635 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
33638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33643 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
33647 \begin_inset space ~
33652 is set to “Default”.
33653 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
33662 \begin_layout Subsection
33666 \begin_layout Standard
33667 To define your header line, add all three header environments.
33668 The things you add to each environment appear on odd numbered pages, the
33669 things in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
33670 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
33672 If you leave a header environment or its argument empty, nothing appears
33674 Defining the footer line works similarly.
33677 \begin_layout Standard
33678 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
33679 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
33683 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33685 \begin_inset space ~
33693 \begin_layout Description
33696 thepage prints the current page number
33699 \begin_layout Description
33702 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
33705 \begin_layout Description
33708 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
33711 \begin_layout Description
33714 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
33715 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
33718 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33722 \begin_inset Quotes prd
33725 because it usually goes in a left header.
33728 \begin_layout Description
33731 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
33732 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
33734 It is normally used in the right header.
33737 \begin_layout Subsection
33738 Default header/footer
33741 \begin_layout Standard
33742 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
33743 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
33744 footer has the page number.
33745 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
33746 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
33747 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
33750 \begin_inset space ~
33758 \begin_layout Subsection
33762 \begin_layout Standard
33763 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
33764 Some pages are different.
33765 The title page has a header/footer environment of its own, and so does
33766 any page that starts a new part or chapter in your book.
33767 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
33768 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
33769 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
33772 \begin_layout Subsubsection
33773 Header and footer decoration line
33776 \begin_layout Standard
33777 By default, you get a 0.4
33778 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33781 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
33782 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
33794 in the following way:
33797 \begin_layout Standard
33804 headrulewidth}{thickness}
33807 \begin_layout Standard
33808 where thickness is a size in standard units like
33821 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
33822 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33828 \begin_layout Standard
33829 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
33831 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in section
33832 \begin_inset space ~
33836 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33846 \begin_layout Subsubsection
33847 Several header/footer lines
33850 \begin_layout Standard
33851 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
33852 this by adding a ragged line break in the style definition.
33853 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the height of
33855 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33870 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33871 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33873 \begin_inset space ~
33881 \begin_layout Standard
33888 headheight}{height}
33891 \begin_layout Standard
33896 is a size in standard units (e.
33897 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33901 \begin_inset space \space{}
33909 If you don't know how much space is needed for the height, define your
33910 header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
33911 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33912 logfile with the menu
33914 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33916 \begin_inset space ~
33924 \begin_inset space ~
33929 to see if you can find a warning about the package
33934 \begin_inset Index idx
33937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33939 packages ! fancyhdr
33945 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
33946 for your header/footer.
33949 \begin_layout Subsection
33953 \begin_layout Standard
33954 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
33955 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
33956 This example consists of the following definition:
33959 \begin_layout Description
33961 \begin_inset space ~
33970 , empty optional argument
33973 \begin_layout Description
33975 \begin_inset space ~
33978 Header empty, empty optional argument
33981 \begin_layout Description
33983 \begin_inset space ~
33992 in the optional argument
33995 \begin_layout Description
33997 \begin_inset space ~
34006 in the optional argument
34009 \begin_layout Description
34011 \begin_inset space ~
34024 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34028 \begin_inset Newline newline
34032 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
34036 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34039 in the optional argument
34042 \begin_layout Description
34044 \begin_inset space ~
34053 , empty optional argument
34056 \begin_layout Description
34059 headrulewidth set to 2
34060 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34066 \begin_layout Standard
34067 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
34068 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
34074 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34084 \begin_layout Standard
34085 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
34091 \begin_layout Standard
34095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34099 pagestyle{headings}
34105 \begin_inset Note Note
34108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34109 switches back to page style with the default headings
34117 \begin_layout Section
34118 Previewing Snippets of your Document
34119 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34121 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
34126 \begin_inset Index idx
34129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34136 \begin_inset Index idx
34139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34148 \begin_layout Standard
34150 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
34151 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
34152 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
34155 \begin_layout Subsection
34159 \begin_layout Standard
34160 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34166 \begin_inset Index idx
34169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34171 packages ! preview-latex
34176 (on some systems named simply
34181 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
34183 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34190 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
34192 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
34200 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
34201 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34202 -package are automatically
34203 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
34207 \begin_layout Subsection
34211 \begin_layout Standard
34212 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
34213 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
34215 activate the option
34218 \begin_inset space ~
34225 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34231 \begin_inset space ~
34235 \begin_inset space ~
34238 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
34245 \begin_inset space ~
34258 \begin_inset space ~
34263 is the multiplication factor for the size.
34266 \begin_layout Standard
34267 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
34272 \begin_inset space ~
34280 \begin_inset space ~
34288 \begin_layout Standard
34289 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
34290 and when you finish
34294 \begin_layout Standard
34295 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34303 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
34304 generated by activating the option
34307 \begin_inset space ~
34313 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
34321 \begin_layout Subsection
34322 Selected document parts
34325 \begin_layout Standard
34326 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
34327 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
34328 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
34329 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
34331 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
34333 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34337 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
34338 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
34339 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
34342 \begin_layout Standard
34343 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34350 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
34355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34362 is explained in section
34364 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
34369 \begin_inset space ~
34379 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
34380 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
34381 the final rotated boxes,
34382 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
34383 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
34385 Here is the result:
34388 \begin_layout Standard
34389 \begin_inset Preview
34391 \begin_layout Standard
34396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34400 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
34406 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
34416 height_special "totalheight"
34421 backgroundcolor "none"
34424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34449 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
34455 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
34462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34477 \begin_layout Standard
34478 Previewing works also for colors.
34479 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34498 is explained in section
34505 \begin_inset space ~
34518 \begin_layout Standard
34519 \begin_inset Preview
34521 \begin_layout Standard
34525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34544 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
34549 This is text within a colored, framed box.
34553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34568 \begin_layout Standard
34569 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
34575 \begin_layout Standard
34576 If \SpecialChar LyX
34577 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
34578 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
34579 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
34580 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34581 packages in your document preamble that are required by
34582 the \SpecialChar TeX
34584 If \SpecialChar LyX
34585 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
34586 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
34588 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
34589 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
34590 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
34593 \begin_layout Subsection
34598 \begin_layout Standard
34599 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34600 source of the whole document or parts of it.
34603 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
34605 \begin_inset space ~
34610 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34612 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
34614 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
34615 's main window, then only this selection
34616 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
34617 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
34618 the source view window.
34623 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
34624 ; but note that if you have
34625 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
34627 not just the one which is open at the time.
34630 \begin_layout Section
34631 Advanced Find and Replace
34632 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34634 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
34639 \begin_inset Index idx
34642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34649 \begin_inset Index idx
34652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34661 \begin_layout Subsection
34665 \begin_layout Standard
34666 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
34667 allows for searching of complex,
34668 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
34670 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
34671 The key-features are:
34674 \begin_layout Itemize
34675 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
34676 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
34677 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
34681 \begin_layout Itemize
34682 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
34683 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
34684 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
34685 a section heading will only be found within section headings
34688 \begin_layout Itemize
34689 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
34690 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
34691 outside of mathematics environments
34694 \begin_layout Itemize
34695 Search may be widened to a specific
34700 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34704 \begin_inset space ~
34707 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
34708 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
34715 \begin_layout Itemize
34716 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
34717 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
34718 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34722 \begin_inset space ~
34725 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
34728 \begin_layout Subsection
34732 \begin_layout Standard
34733 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
34735 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
34748 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
34751 ) or the toolbar button
34754 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
34760 Advanced Find and Replace
34765 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34769 \begin_layout Standard
34775 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
34779 \begin_inset space ~
34784 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
34787 arg "paragraph-break"
34791 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
34792 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
34796 arg "paragraph-break"
34799 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
34803 searches backwards.
34806 \begin_layout Standard
34810 \begin_inset space ~
34815 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
34824 \begin_inset space ~
34829 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
34832 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34833 Searching for mathematics
34836 \begin_layout Standard
34837 Mathematical formulas, such as
34838 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
34841 or something more complex like
34842 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
34845 , may be searched for by typing them in the
34850 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
34851 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
34852 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
34853 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}$
34859 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34863 \begin_layout Standard
34864 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
34865 This is done by switching to the
34869 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
34874 This way, entering in the
34881 \begin_layout Itemize
34882 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
34883 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
34886 \begin_layout Itemize
34887 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
34888 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
34891 \begin_layout Itemize
34892 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
34893 of it only within section headings.
34894 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
34895 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
34899 \begin_layout Itemize
34900 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
34901 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
34904 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34908 \begin_layout Standard
34909 The entries made in the
34913 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
34916 \begin_inset space ~
34922 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
34926 button or alternatively press
34929 arg "paragraph-break"
34936 while the cursor is in the
34939 \begin_inset space ~
34947 \begin_layout Standard
34948 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
34950 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
34954 \begin_layout Itemize
34955 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
34956 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
34957 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34961 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34964 with its typewriter version
34965 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34973 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34979 \begin_layout Itemize
34980 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
34982 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34986 \begin_inset Formula $R$
34990 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34994 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34998 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
35002 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35005 (you may want to enable the
35008 \begin_inset space ~
35016 \begin_inset space ~
35021 options and disable the
35029 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
35030 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35034 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35037 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
35038 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
35042 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
35045 , or occurrences of
35046 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
35050 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
35056 \begin_layout Subsection
35060 \begin_layout Standard
35061 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
35065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35066 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
35068 \begin_inset CommandInset href
35070 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
35080 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
35086 This is done with the context menu
35088 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35089 Insert Regular Expression
35091 while the cursor is in the
35096 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
35097 expression matching rules
35101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35102 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
35105 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35109 \begin_inset space ~
35112 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
35113 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
35119 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
35120 same text in the document.
35121 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
35122 Examples of using such a feature may be:
35125 \begin_layout Enumerate
35126 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
35131 editor the fraction
35132 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
35136 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
35139 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
35140 fractions with the given denominator.
35143 \begin_layout Enumerate
35144 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
35156 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
35161 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
35162 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
35163 Also, by inserting a
35164 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
35167 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
35168 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
35171 \begin_layout Standard
35172 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
35173 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
35174 \begin_inset Formula $()$
35177 , and referring back to them through
35178 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
35182 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
35186 For example, try searching with the regexp
35187 \begin_inset Newline newline
35190 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
35193 \begin_inset Newline newline
35196 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
35199 \begin_layout Standard
35200 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
35203 \begin_layout Standard
35204 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35212 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
35213 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
35214 sub-expressions is absolute.
35216 \begin_inset space ~
35220 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
35223 always refers to the first occurrence of
35224 \begin_inset Formula $()$
35227 in all entered regexps.
35235 \begin_layout Section
35237 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35239 name "sec:Spellchecking"
35244 \begin_inset Index idx
35247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35256 \begin_layout Standard
35258 has a built-in spell checker.
35261 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35268 key or the toolbar button
35271 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
35274 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
35275 beginning of the currently selected text.
35276 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
35277 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
35278 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
35279 scrolled so that it is visible.
35280 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
35281 n, if any could be found.
35282 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
35286 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
35287 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
35290 \begin_layout Standard
35291 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
35294 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35298 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
35299 a different one at the top of the dialog.
35301 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
35302 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
35305 \begin_inset space ~
35313 arg "dialog-show character"
35316 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
35318 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
35321 \begin_layout Standard
35322 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
35323 can be downloaded from here:
35324 \begin_inset Newline newline
35328 \begin_inset Flex URL
35331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35333 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
35339 \begin_inset Newline newline
35343 \begin_inset space ~
35346 files for each language.
35347 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
35348 \begin_inset space ~
35351 files into \SpecialChar LyX
35352 's installation subfolder
35360 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
35362 \begin_inset Newline newline
35365 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
35366 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
35367 but in most cases these are
35383 is the language code.
35386 \begin_layout Subsection
35390 \begin_layout Standard
35393 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35394 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35396 \begin_inset space ~
35399 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35402 you can set the following things:
35405 \begin_layout Description
35407 \begin_inset space ~
35410 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
35411 should use for spell checking.
35412 Depending on your platform,
35422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35423 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
35424 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
35439 \begin_inset space ~
35442 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
35445 \begin_layout Description
35447 \begin_inset space ~
35450 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
35451 will always use the given language
35452 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
35455 \begin_layout Description
35457 \begin_inset space ~
35460 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
35462 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35466 \begin_inset space \space{}
35470 This should normally not be needed.
35473 \begin_layout Description
35475 \begin_inset space ~
35479 \begin_inset space ~
35482 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
35484 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35488 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35494 \begin_layout Description
35496 \begin_inset space ~
35499 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
35500 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
35501 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
35502 appear in a context menu.
35503 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
35507 \begin_layout Description
35509 \begin_inset space ~
35513 \begin_inset space ~
35517 \begin_inset space ~
35520 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
35524 \begin_layout Section
35526 \begin_inset Index idx
35529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35536 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35538 name "sec:Thesaurus"
35545 \begin_layout Standard
35547 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
35548 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
35557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35558 \begin_inset CommandInset href
35560 target "https://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
35570 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
35572 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
35573 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
35574 which are available for many languages.
35577 \begin_layout Standard
35578 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
35579 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
35583 \begin_layout Subsection
35584 Setting up the thesaurus
35587 \begin_layout Standard
35596 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
35600 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
35605 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
35607 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35611 \begin_inset space ~
35619 For instance, the US English files are named:
35622 \begin_layout Itemize
35626 \begin_layout Itemize
35630 \begin_layout Standard
35639 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
35640 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
35643 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35644 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35645 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
35647 \begin_inset space ~
35652 ) to the path where they are installed.
35656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35657 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
35658 ies, typical locations are
35664 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
35668 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
35672 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
35675 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
35681 LibreOffice-<Version>
35688 On the Mac, the default location is
35690 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
35691 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
35692 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
35693 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
35694 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
35695 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
35703 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
35704 during the \SpecialChar LyX
35705 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
35709 \begin_layout Standard
35710 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
35711 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
35713 \begin_inset Newline newline
35717 \begin_inset Flex URL
35720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35722 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/thesaurus/
35730 \begin_layout Standard
35731 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
35732 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
35734 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35735 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35736 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
35738 \begin_inset space ~
35743 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
35745 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
35746 and point \SpecialChar LyX
35750 \begin_layout Standard
35751 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
35753 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
35756 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
35762 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
35765 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
35766 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
35768 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35774 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35775 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35776 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
35778 \begin_inset space ~
35783 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
35786 \begin_layout Subsection
35787 Using the thesaurus
35790 \begin_layout Standard
35791 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
35793 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35796 or the toolbar button
35799 arg "thesaurus-entry"
35802 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
35804 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
35806 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
35807 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
35808 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
35817 ), related terms (such as
35820 \begin_inset space ~
35829 ), compounds (such as
35832 \begin_inset space ~
35841 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
35850 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
35853 \begin_layout Standard
35854 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
35855 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
35859 \begin_layout Standard
35860 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
35861 the dictionary, such as the above
35865 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
35866 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35870 \begin_inset space \space{}
35873 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
35874 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
35875 For example, looking up the word form
35879 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
35884 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
35885 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35889 \begin_inset space \space{}
35900 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
35901 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
35902 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
35905 \begin_layout Section
35907 \begin_inset Index idx
35910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35917 \begin_inset Index idx
35920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35921 Document ! Change Tracking
35927 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35929 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
35936 \begin_layout Standard
35937 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
35938 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
35939 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
35940 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
35942 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35944 \begin_inset space ~
35947 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
35949 \begin_inset space ~
35957 \begin_layout Standard
35958 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
35972 The color depends on the author that made the change.
35973 You can change the color in
35975 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35976 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35978 \begin_inset space ~
35982 \begin_inset space ~
35987 \SpecialChar menuseparator
35993 \begin_inset Index idx
35996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35997 Color ! Change tracking
36002 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
36003 's status bar when the
36004 cursor is in changed text.
36005 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
36008 arg "changes-merge"
36014 \begin_layout Standard
36015 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
36017 \begin_inset Index idx
36020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36029 \begin_layout Standard
36030 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
36036 \begin_layout Standard
36037 \begin_inset Graphics
36038 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
36046 \begin_layout Standard
36047 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
36053 \begin_layout Standard
36054 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
36057 \begin_layout Standard
36058 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
36064 \begin_layout Standard
36065 \begin_inset Tabular
36066 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
36067 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
36068 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
36069 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
36070 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36071 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36079 arg "changes-track"
36087 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36093 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36095 \begin_inset space ~
36098 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36100 \begin_inset space ~
36109 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36110 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36118 arg "changes-output"
36126 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36132 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36134 \begin_inset space ~
36137 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36139 \begin_inset space ~
36143 \begin_inset space ~
36147 \begin_inset space ~
36156 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36157 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36173 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36177 Jumps to the next change
36183 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36184 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36192 arg "change-accept"
36200 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36206 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36208 \begin_inset space ~
36211 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36213 \begin_inset space ~
36222 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36223 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36231 arg "change-reject"
36239 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36245 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36247 \begin_inset space ~
36250 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36252 \begin_inset space ~
36261 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36262 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36270 arg "changes-merge"
36278 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36284 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36286 \begin_inset space ~
36289 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36291 \begin_inset space ~
36300 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36301 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36309 arg "all-changes-accept"
36317 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36323 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36325 \begin_inset space ~
36328 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36330 \begin_inset space ~
36334 \begin_inset space ~
36343 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36344 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36352 arg "all-changes-reject"
36360 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36366 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36368 \begin_inset space ~
36371 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36373 \begin_inset space ~
36377 \begin_inset space ~
36386 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36387 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36403 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36409 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36410 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
36412 \begin_inset space ~
36421 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36422 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36438 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36444 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
36446 \begin_inset space ~
36462 \begin_layout Standard
36463 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
36469 \begin_layout Standard
36470 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
36490 \begin_layout Standard
36491 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
36492 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
36493 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
36494 the next change after the current cursor position.
36495 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
36496 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
36497 step to the next change.
36498 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
36501 \begin_layout Standard
36502 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
36503 to describe a change.
36506 \begin_layout Standard
36507 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36513 \begin_inset Index idx
36516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36524 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
36526 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36533 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
36537 \begin_layout Section
36538 Comparison of Documents
36539 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36541 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
36546 \begin_inset Index idx
36549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36550 Comparison of documents
36558 \begin_layout Standard
36559 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
36562 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36566 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
36567 file with change tracking enabled showing the
36569 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
36571 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
36575 \begin_inset space ~
36579 \begin_inset space ~
36583 \begin_inset space ~
36592 \begin_inset space ~
36596 \begin_inset space ~
36600 \begin_inset space ~
36604 \begin_inset space ~
36608 \begin_inset space ~
36612 \begin_inset space ~
36617 enables the change tracking option
36620 \begin_inset space ~
36624 \begin_inset space ~
36628 \begin_inset space ~
36633 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
36636 \begin_layout Section
36637 International Support
36638 \begin_inset Index idx
36641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36642 International support
36650 \begin_layout Standard
36651 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
36652 with any language you want.
36653 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
36654 up \SpecialChar LyX
36656 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36658 key "Arabic,Armenian,Cyrillic,Farsi,Hebrew,Japanese"
36666 \begin_layout Standard
36667 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
36668 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
36669 \begin_inset space ~
36673 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36675 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
36682 \begin_layout Subsection
36684 \begin_inset Index idx
36687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36694 \begin_inset Index idx
36697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36698 Document ! Settings
36704 \begin_inset Index idx
36707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36708 Document ! Language
36716 \begin_layout Standard
36719 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36720 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36723 dialog lets you set
36725 the language, the quote style and character encoding
36730 \begin_layout Standard
36735 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
36740 \begin_inset space ~
36745 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
36746 For details about the different encoding options see section
36747 \begin_inset space ~
36751 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36753 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
36760 \begin_layout Subsection
36761 Keyboard mapping configuration
36762 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36764 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
36771 \begin_layout Standard
36772 If you have for example a U.
36773 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36776 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
36777 can use an alternate keymap.
36778 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
36783 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36784 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
36785 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
36788 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
36789 \begin_inset space ~
36793 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36795 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
36800 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
36801 which one you want to use.
36804 \begin_layout Standard
36805 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
36806 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
36807 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
36808 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36811 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
36812 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
36813 one to support the characters you want.
36814 This and many other customizations are explained in the
36821 \begin_layout Chapter
36824 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36826 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
36833 \begin_layout Standard
36834 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
36835 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
36836 topic inside the user's guide.
36839 \begin_layout Section
36841 \begin_inset Index idx
36844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36853 \begin_layout Standard
36858 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
36861 \begin_layout Subsection
36865 \begin_layout Standard
36866 Creates a new document.
36869 \begin_layout Subsection
36873 \begin_layout Standard
36874 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
36875 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
36876 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
36879 \begin_layout Subsection
36883 \begin_layout Standard
36887 \begin_layout Subsection
36891 \begin_layout Standard
36892 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
36893 Click there on a file to open it.
36896 \begin_layout Subsection
36900 \begin_layout Standard
36901 Closes the current document.
36904 \begin_layout Subsection
36908 \begin_layout Standard
36909 Closes all opened documents.
36912 \begin_layout Subsection
36916 \begin_layout Standard
36917 Saves the actual document.
36920 \begin_layout Subsection
36924 \begin_layout Standard
36925 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
36928 \begin_layout Subsection
36932 \begin_layout Standard
36933 Saves all opened documents.
36936 \begin_layout Subsection
36940 \begin_layout Standard
36941 Reloads the actual document from disk.
36944 \begin_layout Subsection
36948 \begin_layout Standard
36949 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
36950 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
36951 It is described in the section
36953 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
36958 Additional Features
36963 \begin_layout Subsection
36967 \begin_layout Standard
36968 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
36969 versions, HTML files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
36971 files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
36972 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
36976 \begin_layout Standard
36977 When using the menu entry
36980 \begin_inset space ~
36985 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
36989 \begin_inset space ~
36993 \begin_inset space ~
36997 \begin_inset space ~
37002 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
37003 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
37006 \begin_layout Subsection
37008 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37010 name "subsec:Export"
37017 \begin_layout Standard
37018 You can export your document to various file formats.
37019 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
37021 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
37022 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
37023 during its configuration.
37026 \begin_layout Standard
37027 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
37029 \begin_inset space ~
37033 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37035 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
37042 \begin_layout Description
37048 \begin_inset space ~
37051 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
37053 \begin_inset space ~
37056 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
37057 \begin_inset Newline newline
37060 Since \SpecialChar LyX
37061 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
37065 \begin_layout Description
37066 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
37072 \begin_layout Description
37074 \begin_inset space ~
37077 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
37083 \begin_layout Description
37084 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
37085 's native DVI-format.
37086 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
37087 files paths or file names in your document.
37089 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
37096 \begin_layout Description
37097 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
37098 in files paths or file names
37101 \begin_layout Description
37103 \begin_inset space ~
37110 ) DVI-format using the program
37112 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
37115 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
37119 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
37122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37127 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
37135 \begin_layout Description
37137 \begin_inset space ~
37140 (cropped) the same as
37144 but with cropped page margins.
37147 \begin_layout Description
37149 \begin_inset space ~
37152 Dot text file with code in the programming language
37156 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
37161 \begin_layout Description
37165 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
37168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37173 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
37181 \begin_layout Description
37183 \begin_inset space ~
37187 \begin_inset space ~
37190 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
37194 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
37202 \begin_layout Description
37206 \begin_inset space ~
37215 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37216 source that is compilable with the program
37218 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
37222 \begin_layout Description
37226 \begin_inset space ~
37231 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37232 source, additionally all images used in the document
37233 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
37237 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
37240 \begin_layout Description
37244 \begin_inset space ~
37249 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37250 source code, additionally all images used in the document
37251 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
37259 \begin_layout Description
37263 \begin_inset space ~
37272 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37273 source that is compilable with the program
37279 \begin_layout Description
37281 \begin_inset space ~
37285 \begin_inset space ~
37292 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37293 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
37299 \begin_layout Description
37301 \begin_inset space ~
37304 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
37305 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
37307 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37311 \begin_inset space \space{}
37316 \begin_inset space ~
37320 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37324 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37328 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37332 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37335 represent the version number)
37338 \begin_layout Description
37340 \begin_inset space ~
37344 \begin_inset space ~
37347 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
37348 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
37349 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
37353 \begin_layout Description
37354 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
37355 's internal XHTML engine
37358 \begin_layout Description
37360 \begin_inset space ~
37364 \begin_inset space ~
37368 \begin_inset space ~
37372 \begin_inset space ~
37375 XML Office Open XML file, to be opened with
37380 For the conversion the program
37389 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
37392 \begin_layout Description
37393 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
37398 \begin_layout Description
37400 \begin_inset space ~
37403 (Pandoc) OpenDocument file, to be opened with
37405 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
37408 For the conversion the program
37417 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
37420 \begin_layout Description
37422 \begin_inset space ~
37425 (tex4ht) OpenDocument file.
37426 For the conversion the program
37435 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
37438 \begin_layout Description
37440 \begin_inset space ~
37443 (cropped) the same as
37446 \begin_inset space ~
37451 but with cropped page margins
37454 \begin_layout Description
37458 \begin_inset space ~
37463 PDF-format using the program
37467 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
37470 \begin_layout Description
37474 \begin_inset space ~
37478 \begin_inset space ~
37486 \begin_inset space ~
37491 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
37492 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37496 \begin_inset space \space{}
37499 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
37503 \begin_layout Description
37507 \begin_inset space ~
37512 PDF-format using the program
37514 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
37517 , produces PDF-files directly
37520 \begin_layout Description
37524 \begin_inset space ~
37529 PDF-format using the program
37533 , produces PDF-files directly
37536 \begin_layout Description
37540 \begin_inset space ~
37545 PDF-format using the program
37549 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
37552 \begin_layout Description
37556 \begin_inset space ~
37561 PDF-format using the program
37566 , produces PDF-files directly
37569 \begin_layout Description
37573 \begin_inset space ~
37581 \begin_layout Description
37585 \begin_inset space ~
37589 \begin_inset space ~
37594 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
37595 and then exported as text using the program
37600 \begin_layout Description
37605 PostScript format using the program
37613 options see section
37614 \begin_inset space ~
37618 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37620 reference "subsec:General-output"
37627 \begin_layout Description
37628 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37629 source and also code in the statistical programming
37643 it is possible to use
37647 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
37651 \begin_layout Standard
37652 If one of the menu entries
37659 \begin_inset space ~
37668 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
37670 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
37672 \begin_inset space ~
37676 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37678 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
37683 \begin_inset Index idx
37686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37687 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
37696 \begin_layout Subsection
37700 \begin_layout Standard
37701 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
37702 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
37705 \begin_inset space ~
37709 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37711 reference "sec:Paths"
37716 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
37725 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
37726 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
37727 's preferences as described in section
37728 \begin_inset space ~
37732 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37734 reference "subsec:Converters"
37741 \begin_layout Subsection
37742 New and Close Window
37745 \begin_layout Standard
37746 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
37750 \begin_layout Subsection
37754 \begin_layout Standard
37755 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
37758 \begin_layout Section
37760 \begin_inset Index idx
37763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37772 \begin_layout Subsection
37776 \begin_layout Standard
37777 Described in section
37778 \begin_inset space ~
37782 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37784 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
37791 \begin_layout Subsection
37792 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
37795 \begin_layout Standard
37796 Described in section
37797 \begin_inset space ~
37801 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37803 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
37810 \begin_layout Subsection
37814 \begin_layout Standard
37815 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
37816 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
37819 \begin_layout Subsection
37823 \begin_layout Standard
37824 Selects the whole document.
37827 \begin_layout Subsection
37828 Find & Replace (Quick)
37831 \begin_layout Standard
37832 Described in section
37833 \begin_inset space ~
37837 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37839 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
37846 \begin_layout Subsection
37847 Find & Replace (Advanced)
37850 \begin_layout Standard
37851 Described in section
37852 \begin_inset space ~
37856 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37858 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
37865 \begin_layout Subsection
37866 Move Paragraph Up/Down
37869 \begin_layout Standard
37870 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
37874 \begin_layout Subsection
37878 \begin_layout Standard
37879 Described in section
37880 \begin_inset space ~
37884 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37886 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
37893 \begin_layout Subsection
37895 \begin_inset Index idx
37898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37899 Paragraph ! Settings
37907 \begin_layout Standard
37908 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
37909 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
37913 \begin_layout Standard
37914 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
37915 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
37921 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37922 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37924 \begin_inset space ~
37932 \begin_layout Subsection
37933 Table and Rows & Columns
37936 \begin_layout Standard
37937 These menus only appear if the cursor is inside a table.
37938 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
37939 of a cell and to set the alignment of the cell.
37942 \begin_layout Subsection
37946 \begin_layout Standard
37947 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside an inset.
37948 It will dissolve this inset.
37949 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
37953 \begin_layout Subsection
37957 \begin_layout Standard
37958 This menu is only active if the cursor is inside an inset or a formula.
37959 Here you can change the properties of the inset or the formula.
37962 \begin_layout Subsection
37963 Increase/Decrease List Depth
37966 \begin_layout Standard
37967 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
37969 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
37970 \begin_inset space ~
37974 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37976 reference "sec:Nesting"
37981 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37983 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
37990 \begin_layout Subsection
37992 \change_deleted -712698321 1514652312
37995 Start New Environment/Start New Parent Environment
37998 \begin_layout Standard
38000 \change_deleted -712698321 1514652312
38001 These menus are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive environme
38002 nts of the same type.
38004 \begin_inset space ~
38008 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38010 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
38014 for an explanation.
38019 \begin_layout Section
38021 \begin_inset Index idx
38024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38033 \begin_layout Standard
38034 At the bottom of the
38038 menu the opened documents are listed.
38041 \begin_layout Subsection
38042 Open/Close all Insets
38045 \begin_layout Standard
38046 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
38049 \begin_layout Subsection
38050 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
38053 \begin_layout Standard
38054 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
38057 \begin_layout Standard
38058 Math macros are described in the
38065 \begin_layout Subsection
38069 \begin_layout Standard
38070 Shows the outline window as described in sections
38071 \begin_inset space ~
38075 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38077 reference "sec:Navigating"
38082 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38084 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
38091 \begin_layout Subsection
38095 \begin_layout Standard
38096 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
38098 \begin_inset space ~
38102 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38104 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
38111 \begin_layout Subsection
38115 \begin_layout Standard
38116 Opens a window showing console messages.
38117 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
38119 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38122 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
38123 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
38124 is processing the document.
38127 \begin_layout Subsection
38129 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38131 name "subsec:Toolbars"
38136 \begin_inset Index idx
38139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38148 \begin_layout Standard
38149 In this menu entry you can set the icon size and the appearance of the different
38151 All toolbars and the
38154 \begin_inset space ~
38159 can be turned on and off.
38164 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
38176 \begin_inset space ~
38188 \begin_inset space ~
38193 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
38197 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
38204 \begin_layout Standard
38209 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
38213 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
38214 or when a certain feature is enabled.
38215 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
38216 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
38217 is inside a formula or table respectively.
38220 \begin_layout Standard
38222 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
38223 \begin_inset space ~
38227 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38229 reference "sec:Toolbars"
38236 \begin_layout Subsection
38240 \begin_layout Standard
38244 \begin_inset space ~
38248 \begin_inset space ~
38252 \begin_inset space ~
38256 \begin_inset space ~
38260 \begin_inset space ~
38264 \begin_inset space ~
38269 will split \SpecialChar LyX
38270 's main window vertically while
38273 \begin_inset space ~
38277 \begin_inset space ~
38281 \begin_inset space ~
38285 \begin_inset space ~
38289 \begin_inset space ~
38293 \begin_inset space ~
38298 will split it horizontally.
38299 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
38300 to view the same document, but at different positions.
38301 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
38302 three or more documents at the same time.
38303 To close a split view, use the menu
38306 \begin_inset space ~
38310 \begin_inset space ~
38318 \begin_layout Subsection
38322 \begin_layout Standard
38323 Closes a split view.
38326 \begin_layout Subsection
38330 \begin_layout Standard
38331 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
38332 so that you will see nothing but your text.
38333 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
38334 's main window fullscreen.
38335 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
38336 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
38339 \begin_layout Section
38341 \begin_inset Index idx
38344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38353 \begin_layout Subsection
38357 \begin_layout Standard
38358 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
38359 \begin_inset space ~
38363 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38365 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
38376 \begin_layout Subsection
38378 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38380 name "subsec:Special-Character"
38387 \begin_layout Standard
38388 Here you can insert the following characters:
38391 \begin_layout Description
38396 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
38399 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
38400 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38401 -packages you have installed.
38402 You can get a complete display by checking
38405 \begin_inset space ~
38411 \begin_inset Newline newline
38415 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
38418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38423 Not all characters will be visible in the
38427 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
38428 dialog (see section
38429 \begin_inset space ~
38433 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38435 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
38439 ) can display every character.
38447 \begin_layout Description
38448 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
38452 \begin_layout Description
38454 \begin_inset space ~
38458 \begin_inset space ~
38461 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
38462 \begin_inset space ~
38466 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38468 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
38475 \begin_layout Description
38477 \begin_inset space ~
38480 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
38483 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38484 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38490 \begin_layout Description
38492 \begin_inset space ~
38495 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
38498 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38499 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38505 \begin_layout Description
38507 \begin_inset space ~
38510 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
38514 \begin_layout Description
38516 \begin_inset space ~
38519 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
38523 \begin_layout Description
38525 \begin_inset space ~
38528 Space Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when
38534 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
38540 \begin_layout Description
38542 \begin_inset space ~
38545 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
38549 \begin_layout Description
38551 \begin_inset space ~
38555 \begin_inset Index idx
38558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38565 \begin_inset Index idx
38568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38569 Language ! Phonetic symbols
38574 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
38575 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
38577 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38583 \begin_inset Index idx
38586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38594 \begin_inset Newline newline
38597 More information about this feature can be found in the
38603 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
38609 \begin_layout Description
38610 Logos Inserts the logos of the programs \SpecialChar LyX
38612 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
38613 and \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
38617 \begin_layout Subsection
38621 \begin_layout Standard
38622 Opens a submenu with the following options:
38625 \begin_layout Description
38626 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
38627 \begin_inset script superscript
38629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38638 \begin_layout Description
38639 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
38640 \begin_inset script subscript
38642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38651 \begin_layout Description
38653 \begin_inset space ~
38656 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
38657 \begin_inset space ~
38661 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38663 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
38670 \begin_layout Description
38672 \begin_inset space ~
38675 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
38676 \begin_inset space ~
38680 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38682 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
38689 \begin_layout Description
38691 \begin_inset space ~
38694 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
38695 \begin_inset space ~
38699 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38701 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
38708 \begin_layout Description
38710 \begin_inset space ~
38713 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
38715 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38719 \begin_inset space \space{}
38722 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
38723 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
38729 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38732 To insert a fraction use the command
38737 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
38741 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
38747 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38750 The visible space is hereby the character before the
38757 \begin_layout Description
38759 \begin_inset space ~
38762 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
38763 \begin_inset space ~
38767 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38769 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
38776 \begin_layout Description
38778 \begin_inset space ~
38781 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
38782 \begin_inset space ~
38786 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38788 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
38795 \begin_layout Description
38797 \begin_inset space ~
38800 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
38801 \begin_inset space ~
38805 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38807 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
38814 \begin_layout Description
38815 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
38816 \begin_inset space ~
38820 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38822 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
38829 \begin_layout Description
38831 \begin_inset space ~
38834 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
38835 \begin_inset space ~
38839 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38841 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
38848 \begin_layout Description
38850 \begin_inset space ~
38853 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
38854 \begin_inset space ~
38858 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38860 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
38867 \begin_layout Description
38869 \begin_inset space ~
38873 \begin_inset space ~
38876 Break Inserts a line break point (zero-width space character) that is invisible
38879 \begin_inset space ~
38883 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38885 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
38892 for a usage example.
38895 \begin_layout Description
38897 \begin_inset space ~
38901 \begin_inset space ~
38904 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
38905 \begin_inset space ~
38909 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38911 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
38918 \begin_layout Description
38920 \begin_inset space ~
38923 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
38924 as described in section
38925 \begin_inset space ~
38929 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38931 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
38938 \begin_layout Description
38940 \begin_inset space ~
38943 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
38944 \begin_inset space ~
38948 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38950 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
38957 \begin_layout Description
38959 \begin_inset space ~
38962 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
38963 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
38965 \begin_inset space ~
38969 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38971 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
38978 \begin_layout Description
38980 \begin_inset space ~
38983 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
38984 \begin_inset space ~
38988 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38990 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
38997 \begin_layout Description
38999 \begin_inset space ~
39003 \begin_inset space ~
39006 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
39007 \begin_inset space ~
39011 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39013 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
39020 \begin_layout Subsection
39024 \begin_layout Standard
39025 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
39029 \begin_inset space ~
39050 are described in section
39051 \begin_inset space ~
39055 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39057 reference "sec:toc"
39066 is described in section
39067 \begin_inset space ~
39071 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39073 reference "sec:Index"
39081 is described in section
39082 \begin_inset space ~
39086 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39088 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
39094 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
39097 is described in section
39098 \begin_inset space ~
39102 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39104 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
39111 \begin_layout Subsection
39115 \begin_layout Standard
39116 To insert floats, as described in section
39117 \begin_inset space ~
39121 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39123 reference "sec:Floats"
39127 and in detail the chapter
39134 \begin_inset space ~
39142 \begin_layout Subsection
39146 \begin_layout Standard
39147 To insert notes, described in section
39148 \begin_inset space ~
39152 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39154 reference "sec:Notes"
39161 \begin_layout Subsection
39165 \begin_layout Standard
39166 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
39168 Branches are described in section
39169 \begin_inset space ~
39173 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39175 reference "sec:Branches"
39182 \begin_layout Subsection
39186 \begin_layout Standard
39187 Inserts document class-specific insets.
39188 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
39190 An example is the document class
39191 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39195 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39198 with three custom insets.
39201 Flex insets and InsetLayout
39205 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
39211 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
39214 \begin_layout Subsection
39216 \begin_inset Index idx
39219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39228 \begin_layout Standard
39229 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
39231 For more information see chapter
39233 External Document Parts
39236 \begin_inset space ~
39242 \begin_layout Subsection
39244 \begin_inset Index idx
39247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39256 \begin_layout Standard
39257 Inserts a box in a certain style.
39258 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
39265 \begin_inset space ~
39273 \begin_layout Subsection
39277 \begin_layout Standard
39282 dialog as described in section
39283 \begin_inset space ~
39287 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39289 reference "sec:Bibliography"
39296 \begin_layout Subsection
39300 \begin_layout Standard
39305 as described in section
39306 \begin_inset space ~
39310 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39312 reference "sec:Cross-References"
39319 \begin_layout Subsection
39323 \begin_layout Standard
39328 as described in section
39329 \begin_inset space ~
39333 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39335 reference "sec:Cross-References"
39342 \begin_layout Subsection
39344 \begin_inset Index idx
39347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39354 \begin_inset Index idx
39357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39358 Tables ! Multi-page ! Caption
39366 \begin_layout Standard
39367 Inserts a caption in a float or multi-page table.
39368 Floats are described in section
39369 \begin_inset space ~
39373 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39375 reference "sec:Floats"
39379 ; captions in multi-page tables are described in the section
39381 Multi-page Captions
39386 \begin_inset space ~
39394 \begin_layout Subsection
39398 \begin_layout Standard
39399 Inserts an index entry as described in section
39400 \begin_inset space ~
39404 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39406 reference "sec:Index"
39413 \begin_layout Subsection
39417 \begin_layout Standard
39418 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
39419 \begin_inset space ~
39423 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39425 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
39432 \begin_layout Subsection
39436 \begin_layout Standard
39437 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
39438 Tables are described in section
39439 \begin_inset space ~
39443 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39445 reference "sec:Tables"
39449 and in detail in the chapter
39456 \begin_inset space ~
39464 \begin_layout Subsection
39468 \begin_layout Standard
39474 Graphics are described in section
39475 \begin_inset space ~
39479 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39481 reference "sec:Graphics"
39488 \begin_layout Subsection
39492 \begin_layout Standard
39493 Inserts a URL as described in section
39494 \begin_inset space ~
39498 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39500 reference "subsec:URLs"
39507 \begin_layout Subsection
39511 \begin_layout Standard
39512 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
39513 \begin_inset space ~
39517 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39519 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
39526 \begin_layout Subsection
39530 \begin_layout Standard
39531 Inserts a footnote as described in section
39532 \begin_inset space ~
39536 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39538 reference "sec:Footnotes"
39545 \begin_layout Subsection
39549 \begin_layout Standard
39550 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
39551 \begin_inset space ~
39555 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39557 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
39562 \change_inserted -712698321 1514652349
39566 \begin_layout Subsection
39568 \change_inserted -712698321 1514652384
39571 Separate <Name> Environment (Above/Below)
39574 \begin_layout Standard
39576 \change_inserted -712698321 1514652391
39577 These menu items are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive
39578 environments of the same type.
39580 \begin_inset space ~
39584 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39586 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
39590 for an explanation.
39595 \begin_layout Subsection
39599 \begin_layout Standard
39600 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
39601 title or caption of a float.
39602 Inserts a short title as described in section
39603 \begin_inset space ~
39607 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39609 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
39616 \begin_layout Subsection
39621 \begin_layout Standard
39622 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
39623 Code box as described in section
39624 \begin_inset space ~
39628 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39630 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
39637 \begin_layout Subsection
39639 \begin_inset Index idx
39642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39651 \begin_layout Standard
39652 Inserts a program listings box.
39653 Program listings are explained in the chapter
39655 Program Code Listings
39660 \begin_inset space ~
39668 \begin_layout Subsection
39672 \begin_layout Standard
39673 Inserts the actual date.
39674 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
39679 \begin_layout Subsection
39683 \begin_layout Standard
39684 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
39685 \begin_inset space ~
39689 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39691 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
39698 \begin_layout Section
39700 \begin_inset Index idx
39703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39712 \begin_layout Standard
39713 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
39714 \begin_inset space ~
39717 of the current document.
39718 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
39721 \begin_layout Subsection
39725 \begin_layout Standard
39726 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
39727 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
39728 to jump, for example, between section
39729 \begin_inset space ~
39733 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
39734 \begin_inset space ~
39737 2.5 and use the submenu
39740 \begin_inset space ~
39744 \begin_inset space ~
39751 \begin_inset space ~
39757 \begin_inset space ~
39761 \begin_inset space ~
39767 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
39771 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
39777 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
39780 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
39783 \begin_layout Standard
39784 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
39788 \begin_inset space ~
39793 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
39796 \begin_inset space ~
39801 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
39804 \begin_layout Subsection
39805 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
39808 \begin_layout Standard
39809 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
39813 \begin_layout Subsection
39817 \begin_layout Standard
39818 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
39819 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
39820 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
39824 \begin_inset space ~
39828 \begin_inset space ~
39836 \begin_layout Subsection
39840 \begin_layout Standard
39841 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
39844 The \SpecialChar LyX
39845 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
39847 \begin_inset space ~
39855 \begin_inset space ~
39860 manual for a detailed description.
39863 \begin_layout Section
39865 \begin_inset Index idx
39868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39877 \begin_layout Subsection
39881 \begin_layout Standard
39882 Change Tracking is described in section
39883 \begin_inset space ~
39887 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39889 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
39896 \begin_layout Subsection
39904 \begin_layout Standard
39905 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
39906 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
39907 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39909 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
39910 to the clipboard or update the view.
39911 \begin_inset Newline newline
39914 With the help of the logfile, experts can find reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
39918 \begin_layout Standard
39921 Open Containing Directory
39923 one can open \SpecialChar LyX
39924 's temporary folder for the document.
39925 This folder contains all converted and created files to generate the output.
39926 Some of these files might be of interest for experts to solve problems
39927 or for writers who need to supply intermediate files.
39928 For example some journals require to send the
39932 file (a text file with the used Bib\SpecialChar TeX
39936 \begin_layout Subsection
39937 Start Appendix Here
39940 \begin_layout Standard
39941 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
39942 as described in section
39943 \begin_inset space ~
39947 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39949 reference "sec:Appendices"
39956 \begin_layout Subsection
39958 \begin_inset space ~
39964 \begin_layout Standard
39965 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
39966 default output format for the document (menu
39968 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39969 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
39970 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
39972 \begin_inset space ~
39976 \begin_inset space ~
39982 \begin_inset space ~
39986 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39988 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
39992 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
39995 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39996 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
39998 \begin_inset space ~
40001 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40003 \begin_inset space ~
40006 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40008 \begin_inset space ~
40012 \begin_inset space ~
40018 \begin_inset space ~
40022 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40024 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40028 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
40029 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
40031 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40032 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40034 \begin_inset space ~
40037 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40039 \begin_inset space ~
40042 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40046 \begin_inset space ~
40050 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40052 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40057 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
40058 when it is first configured.
40059 The default output format is
40062 \begin_inset space ~
40070 \begin_layout Subsection
40071 View (Other Formats)
40074 \begin_layout Standard
40075 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
40076 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
40077 actual document with an external program.
40078 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
40079 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40080 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
40082 All possible formats are listed in section
40083 \begin_inset space ~
40087 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40089 reference "subsec:Export"
40094 You should at least see the menu entry
40099 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40101 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
40103 \begin_inset space ~
40107 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40109 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
40114 \begin_inset Index idx
40117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40118 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
40127 \begin_layout Standard
40128 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
40129 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
40131 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40132 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40134 \begin_inset space ~
40137 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40139 \begin_inset space ~
40142 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40146 \begin_inset space ~
40150 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40152 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40157 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
40158 when it is first configured.
40161 \begin_layout Subsection
40163 \begin_inset space ~
40169 \begin_layout Standard
40170 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
40171 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
40174 \begin_layout Subsection
40175 Update (Other Formats)
40178 \begin_layout Standard
40179 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
40180 your document without opening a new viewer window.
40183 \begin_layout Subsection
40184 View Master Document
40187 \begin_layout Standard
40188 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
40190 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40194 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40204 \begin_inset space ~
40209 manual for more information on this topic).
40210 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
40211 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
40215 \begin_inset space ~
40219 \begin_inset space ~
40224 generates the output of the whole book, while
40228 will just output the chapter alone.
40231 \begin_layout Standard
40232 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
40233 in the document settings (menu
40235 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40236 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40237 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
40239 \begin_inset space ~
40243 \begin_inset space ~
40249 \begin_inset space ~
40253 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40255 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
40259 ) or in the preferences (menu
40261 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40262 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40264 \begin_inset space ~
40267 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40269 \begin_inset space ~
40272 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40274 \begin_inset space ~
40278 \begin_inset space ~
40284 \begin_inset space ~
40288 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40290 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40297 \begin_layout Subsection
40298 Update Master Document
40301 \begin_layout Standard
40302 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
40304 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40308 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40318 \begin_inset space ~
40323 manual for more information on this topic).
40324 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
40325 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
40328 \begin_layout Standard
40329 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
40330 in the document settings (menu
40332 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40333 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40334 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
40336 \begin_inset space ~
40340 \begin_inset space ~
40346 \begin_inset space ~
40350 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40352 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
40356 ) or in the preferences (menu
40358 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40359 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40361 \begin_inset space ~
40364 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40366 \begin_inset space ~
40369 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40371 \begin_inset space ~
40375 \begin_inset space ~
40381 \begin_inset space ~
40385 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40387 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40394 \begin_layout Subsection
40396 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40398 name "subsec:Compressed"
40405 \begin_layout Standard
40406 Un/compresses the current document.
40407 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable
40408 compression (see the
40410 Additional Features
40412 manual for details).
40415 \begin_layout Subsection
40419 \begin_layout Standard
40420 Toggles the read-only state for the document.
40423 \begin_layout Subsection
40427 \begin_layout Standard
40428 The document settings are described in appendix
40429 \begin_inset space ~
40433 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40435 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
40442 \begin_layout Section
40444 \begin_inset Index idx
40447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40456 \begin_layout Subsection
40460 \begin_layout Standard
40461 Spell checking is explained in section
40462 \begin_inset space ~
40466 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40468 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
40475 \begin_layout Subsection
40479 \begin_layout Standard
40480 The thesaurus is described in section
40481 \begin_inset space ~
40485 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40487 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
40494 \begin_layout Subsection
40496 \begin_inset Index idx
40499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40506 \begin_inset Index idx
40509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40518 \begin_layout Standard
40519 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
40520 the highlighted document part.
40523 \begin_layout Subsection
40529 \begin_inset Index idx
40532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40533 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
40542 \begin_layout Standard
40543 Generates with the help of the program
40545 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
40548 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
40549 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
40550 This feature is not available on Windows.
40553 \begin_layout Subsection
40559 \begin_inset Index idx
40562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40572 \begin_layout Standard
40573 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40578 \begin_inset space ~
40583 to see the full filename paths.
40586 \begin_layout Subsection
40588 \begin_inset Index idx
40591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40600 \begin_layout Standard
40601 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
40602 files as described in section
40603 \begin_inset space ~
40607 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40609 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
40616 \begin_layout Subsection
40618 \begin_inset Index idx
40621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40634 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
40639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40652 \begin_inset Index idx
40655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40656 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
40665 \begin_layout Standard
40666 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
40667 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
40668 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
40669 -packages and programs it needs; see
40671 \begin_inset space ~
40675 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40677 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
40684 \begin_layout Subsection
40688 \begin_layout Standard
40693 dialog as described in detail in appendix
40694 \begin_inset space ~
40698 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40700 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
40707 \begin_layout Section
40709 \begin_inset Index idx
40712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40721 \begin_layout Standard
40722 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
40723 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
40725 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
40729 \begin_layout Standard
40733 \begin_inset space ~
40738 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
40739 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40740 packages and classes found
40741 by \SpecialChar LyX
40743 \begin_inset space ~
40747 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40749 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
40756 \begin_layout Standard
40760 \begin_inset space ~
40765 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
40770 \begin_layout Section
40772 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40774 name "sec:Toolbars"
40781 \begin_layout Standard
40782 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
40783 \begin_inset space ~
40787 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40789 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
40796 \begin_layout Standard
40797 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
40798 This is described in the
40800 Additional Features
40805 \begin_layout Subsection
40807 \begin_inset Index idx
40810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40819 \begin_layout Standard
40820 \begin_inset Graphics
40821 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
40829 \begin_layout Standard
40830 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
40836 \begin_layout Standard
40837 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
40842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40854 \begin_inset Note Note
40857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40858 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
40863 manual for more information.
40871 \begin_layout Standard
40872 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
40878 \begin_layout Standard
40879 \begin_inset Tabular
40880 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
40881 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
40882 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
40883 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
40885 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40889 \begin_inset Graphics
40890 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
40900 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40904 pull-down box for the environments
40917 \begin_layout Standard
40918 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
40924 \begin_layout Standard
40926 \begin_inset Tabular
40927 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="22" columns="2">
40928 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
40929 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
40930 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
40931 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40932 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40948 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40954 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
40961 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40962 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40978 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40984 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
40991 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40992 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41008 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41014 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
41021 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41022 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41030 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
41038 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41044 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41051 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41052 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41060 arg "spelling-continuously"
41068 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41072 Spellcheck continuously
41078 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41079 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41095 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41101 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41108 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41109 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41125 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41131 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41138 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41139 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41155 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41161 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41168 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41169 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41185 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41191 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41198 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41199 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41215 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41221 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41228 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41229 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41237 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
41245 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41251 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41253 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41257 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41261 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41270 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41271 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41277 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
41285 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41291 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41293 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41297 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41301 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41310 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41311 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41319 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
41327 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41333 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
41334 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
41341 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41342 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41358 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41362 Emphasize text, function of the
41364 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41366 \begin_inset space ~
41369 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
41378 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41379 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41395 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41399 Set text to noun style, function of the
41401 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41403 \begin_inset space ~
41406 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
41415 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41416 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41424 arg "textstyle-apply"
41432 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41436 Format text using the current settings in the
41438 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41440 \begin_inset space ~
41443 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
41452 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41453 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41469 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41475 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41476 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
41478 \begin_inset space ~
41487 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41488 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41496 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
41504 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41510 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41517 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41518 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41524 arg "tabular-insert"
41532 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41538 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41545 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41546 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41554 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
41562 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41566 Toggle outline window on/off,
41568 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
41575 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41576 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41584 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
41592 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41596 Toggle math toolbar on/off
41602 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41603 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41611 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
41619 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41623 Toggle table toolbar on/off
41636 \begin_layout Subsection
41638 \begin_inset Index idx
41641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41650 \begin_layout Standard
41651 \begin_inset Graphics
41652 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
41660 \begin_layout Standard
41661 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
41667 \begin_layout Standard
41668 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
41672 \begin_layout Standard
41673 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
41679 \begin_layout Standard
41680 \begin_inset Tabular
41681 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="25" columns="2">
41682 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
41683 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
41684 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
41685 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41686 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41702 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41712 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41713 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41721 arg "layout Enumerate"
41729 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41739 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41740 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41748 arg "layout Itemize"
41756 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41766 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41767 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41783 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41793 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41794 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41802 arg "layout Description"
41810 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41820 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41821 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41829 arg "depth-increment"
41837 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41843 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41845 \begin_inset space ~
41849 \begin_inset space ~
41858 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41859 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41867 arg "depth-decrement"
41875 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41881 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41883 \begin_inset space ~
41887 \begin_inset space ~
41896 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41897 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41905 arg "float-insert figure"
41913 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41919 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41920 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
41927 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41928 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41936 arg "float-insert table"
41944 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41950 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41951 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
41958 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41959 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41975 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41981 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41988 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41989 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41997 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
42005 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42011 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42018 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42019 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42027 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
42035 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42041 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42048 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42049 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42065 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42071 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42073 \begin_inset space ~
42082 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42083 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42091 arg "nomencl-insert"
42099 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42105 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42107 \begin_inset space ~
42116 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42117 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42125 arg "footnote-insert"
42133 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42139 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42146 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42147 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42155 arg "marginalnote-insert"
42163 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42169 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42171 \begin_inset space ~
42180 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42181 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42197 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42203 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42204 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
42206 \begin_inset space ~
42215 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42216 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42224 arg "box-insert Frameless"
42232 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42238 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42245 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42246 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42262 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42268 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42275 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42276 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42292 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42298 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42300 \begin_inset space ~
42309 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42310 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42318 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
42326 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42332 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42333 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
42340 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42341 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42349 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
42357 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42363 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42364 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
42366 \begin_inset space ~
42375 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42376 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42384 arg "dialog-show character"
42392 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42398 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42400 \begin_inset space ~
42403 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
42410 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42411 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42419 arg "layout-paragraph"
42427 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42433 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42435 \begin_inset space ~
42444 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42445 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42453 arg "thesaurus-entry"
42461 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42467 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42481 \begin_layout Subsection
42482 View/Update Toolbar
42483 \begin_inset Index idx
42486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42487 Toolbar ! View / Update
42495 \begin_layout Standard
42496 \begin_inset Graphics
42497 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
42504 \begin_layout Standard
42505 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42511 \begin_layout Standard
42512 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
42516 \begin_layout Standard
42517 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42523 \begin_layout Standard
42524 \begin_inset Tabular
42525 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
42526 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
42527 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
42528 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
42529 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42530 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42546 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42552 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42559 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42560 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42568 arg "buffer-update"
42576 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42582 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42589 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42590 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42598 arg "master-buffer-view"
42606 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42612 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42614 \begin_inset space ~
42623 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42624 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42632 arg "master-buffer-update"
42640 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42646 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42648 \begin_inset space ~
42652 \begin_inset space ~
42661 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42662 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42670 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
42678 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42684 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42685 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42686 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
42687 Synchronize with Output
42693 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42694 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42710 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42716 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42717 View (Other Formats)
42723 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42724 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42730 arg "update-others"
42738 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42744 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42745 Update (Other Formats)
42758 \begin_layout Standard
42759 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
42763 \begin_layout Subsection
42767 \begin_layout Standard
42768 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
42769 \begin_inset space ~
42773 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42775 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
42779 , the table toolbar
42780 \begin_inset Index idx
42783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42792 \begin_inset space ~
42797 manual and the math macro toolbar
42798 \begin_inset Index idx
42801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42814 \begin_layout Chapter
42815 The Document Settings
42816 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42818 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
42823 \begin_inset Index idx
42826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42827 Document ! Settings
42835 \begin_layout Standard
42839 \begin_inset space ~
42844 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
42845 is called with the menu
42847 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42851 You can save your document settings as default with the
42853 Save as Document Defaults
42855 button in any dialog.
42856 This will create a template named
42860 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
42861 when you create a new document without
42865 \begin_layout Standard
42870 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
42871 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
42874 \begin_layout Standard
42875 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
42876 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
42877 to find the one you are looking for.
42878 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
42879 the submenus of the dialog.
42881 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42885 \begin_inset space \space{}
42889 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42893 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42896 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
42897 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
42898 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
42901 \begin_layout Section
42905 \begin_layout Standard
42906 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
42908 Document classes are described in section
42909 \begin_inset space ~
42913 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42915 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
42923 \begin_layout Standard
42927 \begin_inset space ~
42932 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
42937 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
42938 as a layout for a document class.
42939 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
42941 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
42950 \begin_layout Standard
42951 Some classes use special class options by default.
42952 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
42956 and you can decide to use them or not.
42957 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
42958 recommended you leave them untouched.
42963 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
42964 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
42969 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42971 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
42976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42977 When you want to use one of the following drivers
42978 \begin_inset Newline newline
42983 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
42986 \begin_inset Newline newline
42989 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
42990 distribution, see section
42995 \begin_inset CommandInset href
42997 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
43010 \begin_layout Standard
43015 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
43016 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
43017 in the background if the child document
43018 is opened without its master.
43019 This way child documents are always compilable.
43020 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
43027 \begin_inset space ~
43035 \begin_layout Standard
43036 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43047 \begin_inset Index idx
43050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43052 packages ! prettyref
43058 \begin_inset Index idx
43061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43063 packages ! refstyle
43068 for cross-references, see section
43069 \begin_inset space ~
43073 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43075 reference "sec:Cross-References"
43082 \begin_layout Section
43086 \begin_layout Standard
43087 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
43088 Please refer to the section
43091 \begin_inset space ~
43099 \begin_inset space ~
43104 manual for details.
43107 \begin_layout Section
43111 \begin_layout Standard
43112 Modules are explained in section
43113 \begin_inset space ~
43117 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43119 reference "subsec:Modules"
43126 \begin_layout Section
43130 \begin_layout Standard
43132 \begin_inset space ~
43136 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43138 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
43145 \begin_layout Section
43149 \begin_layout Standard
43150 The document font settings are described in section
43151 \begin_inset space ~
43155 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43157 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
43164 \begin_layout Section
43168 \begin_layout Standard
43169 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
43181 \begin_inset space ~
43186 and whether it should be a
43189 \begin_inset space ~
43194 can also be specified here.
43197 \begin_layout Standard
43198 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
43199 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
43200 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
43202 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
43205 \begin_layout Standard
43208 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
43211 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
43212 justifies the text on screen.
43213 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
43217 \begin_layout Section
43221 \begin_layout Standard
43222 This dialog is described in sections
43223 \begin_inset space ~
43227 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43229 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
43234 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43236 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
43243 \begin_layout Section
43247 \begin_layout Standard
43248 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
43249 \begin_inset space ~
43253 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43255 reference "subsec:Margins"
43262 \begin_layout Section
43264 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43266 name "sec:Language-encodings"
43271 \begin_inset Index idx
43274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43275 Language ! Encoding
43283 \begin_layout Standard
43284 The document language and quote styles are set here.
43285 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
43286 (the \SpecialChar LyX
43288 is always encoded in utf8).
43289 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
43290 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
43291 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
43292 -command is not known for
43293 a particular character).
43296 \begin_layout Standard
43297 If you use the option
43302 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
43303 If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more
43304 than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43306 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
43307 exactly one encoding.
43308 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
43311 \begin_layout Standard
43313 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
43314 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
43315 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
43316 installation supports Unicode), choose
43317 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
43318 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
43319 is quite incomplete, so
43320 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
43325 (when \SpecialChar LyX
43326 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
43327 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
43328 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
43329 -commands is not used, because all
43330 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
43331 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
43332 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
43333 , two new alternative engines
43334 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
43336 Both engines support Unicode natively.
43338 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
43341 \begin_inset space ~
43349 \begin_inset space ~
43357 \begin_inset space ~
43363 \begin_inset space ~
43367 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43369 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
43374 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
43378 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
43381 \begin_layout Standard
43385 \begin_inset space ~
43390 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43391 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
43393 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43397 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43401 The possible settings are:
43404 \begin_layout Description
43405 Default uses the language package that is selected in
43407 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43408 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
43412 \begin_inset space ~
43416 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43418 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
43425 \begin_layout Description
43426 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
43427 format you will use.
43428 In many cases this will be
43433 \begin_inset Index idx
43436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43444 If the newer package
43449 \begin_inset Index idx
43452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43454 packages ! polyglossia
43459 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
43460 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
43461 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
43463 this package will be used instead of
43470 \begin_layout Description
43472 \begin_inset space ~
43483 would be more appropriate.
43486 \begin_layout Description
43487 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
43488 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
43492 (for German texts), type in
43495 \begin_inset Newline newline
43500 usepackage{ngerman}
43503 \begin_layout Description
43504 None will not use a language package.
43505 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
43508 \begin_layout Standard
43509 Here is a list with the important encodings:
43512 \begin_layout Description
43514 \begin_inset space ~
43518 \begin_inset space ~
43522 \begin_inset space ~
43529 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43535 \begin_inset Index idx
43538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43540 packages ! inputenc
43546 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
43547 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
43548 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
43552 \begin_layout Description
43553 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
43555 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
43556 commands, which may result in a big
43557 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
43558 -commands are needed.
43561 \begin_layout Description
43563 \begin_inset space ~
43567 \begin_inset space ~
43570 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
43573 \begin_layout Description
43575 \begin_inset space ~
43579 \begin_inset space ~
43582 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
43585 \begin_layout Description
43587 \begin_inset space ~
43590 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
43593 \begin_layout Description
43595 \begin_inset space ~
43599 \begin_inset space ~
43602 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
43603 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
43606 \begin_layout Description
43608 \begin_inset space ~
43612 \begin_inset space ~
43615 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
43619 \begin_layout Description
43621 \begin_inset space ~
43625 \begin_inset space ~
43628 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
43629 ISO-8859-13 encoding
43632 \begin_layout Description
43634 \begin_inset space ~
43638 \begin_inset space ~
43642 \begin_inset space ~
43645 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
43646 \begin_inset space ~
43652 \begin_layout Description
43654 \begin_inset space ~
43658 \begin_inset space ~
43662 \begin_inset space ~
43665 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
43666 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
43669 \begin_layout Description
43671 \begin_inset space ~
43675 \begin_inset space ~
43678 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
43679 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
43680 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
43681 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
43682 \begin_inset space ~
43686 \begin_inset space ~
43692 \begin_layout Description
43694 \begin_inset space ~
43698 \begin_inset space ~
43701 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
43702 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
43703 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
43705 should try to use the encoding Unicode
43706 \begin_inset space ~
43710 \begin_inset space ~
43716 \begin_layout Description
43718 \begin_inset space ~
43722 \begin_inset space ~
43725 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
43728 \begin_layout Description
43730 \begin_inset space ~
43734 \begin_inset space ~
43737 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
43740 \begin_layout Description
43742 \begin_inset space ~
43746 \begin_inset space ~
43749 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
43752 \begin_layout Description
43754 \begin_inset space ~
43757 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
43760 \begin_layout Description
43762 \begin_inset space ~
43765 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
43768 \begin_layout Description
43770 \begin_inset space ~
43774 \begin_inset space ~
43777 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
43780 \begin_layout Description
43782 \begin_inset space ~
43786 \begin_inset space ~
43792 \begin_layout Description
43794 \begin_inset space ~
43798 \begin_inset space ~
43801 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
43804 \begin_layout Description
43806 \begin_inset space ~
43810 \begin_inset space ~
43816 \begin_layout Description
43818 \begin_inset space ~
43822 \begin_inset space ~
43825 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43831 \begin_inset Index idx
43834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43841 , when using this, set the document language to
43846 \begin_layout Description
43848 \begin_inset space ~
43852 \begin_inset space ~
43855 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43860 , when using this, set the document language to
43863 \begin_inset space ~
43869 \begin_layout Description
43871 \begin_inset space ~
43875 \begin_inset space ~
43878 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43884 \begin_inset Index idx
43887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43889 packages ! japanese
43894 , when using this, set the document language to
43899 \begin_layout Description
43901 \begin_inset space ~
43905 \begin_inset space ~
43908 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43913 , when using this, set the document language to
43918 \begin_layout Description
43920 \begin_inset space ~
43924 \begin_inset space ~
43927 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43932 , when using this, set the document language to
43937 \begin_layout Description
43939 \begin_inset space ~
43942 (EUC-KR) for Korean
43945 \begin_layout Description
43947 \begin_inset space ~
43951 \begin_inset space ~
43955 \begin_inset space ~
43958 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
43961 \begin_layout Description
43963 \begin_inset space ~
43967 \begin_inset space ~
43971 \begin_inset space ~
43974 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
43975 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
43976 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
43979 \begin_layout Description
43981 \begin_inset space ~
43985 \begin_inset space ~
43991 \begin_layout Description
43993 \begin_inset space ~
43997 \begin_inset space ~
44000 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
44001 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
44004 \begin_layout Description
44006 \begin_inset space ~
44010 \begin_inset space ~
44013 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44019 \begin_inset Index idx
44022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44029 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
44032 \begin_layout Description
44034 \begin_inset space ~
44042 \begin_inset space ~
44045 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
44052 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
44055 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44062 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
44063 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
44065 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
44068 \begin_layout Description
44070 \begin_inset space ~
44074 \begin_inset space ~
44077 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44083 \begin_inset Index idx
44086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44093 (comprehensive, including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
44096 \begin_layout Description
44098 \begin_inset space ~
44101 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44107 \begin_inset Index idx
44110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44112 packages ! inputenc
44118 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
44122 \begin_layout Description
44124 \begin_inset space ~
44128 \begin_inset space ~
44132 \begin_inset space ~
44135 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
44136 \begin_inset space ~
44142 \begin_layout Description
44144 \begin_inset space ~
44148 \begin_inset space ~
44152 \begin_inset space ~
44155 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
44156 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
44157 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
44161 \begin_layout Description
44163 \begin_inset space ~
44167 \begin_inset space ~
44171 \begin_inset space ~
44174 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
44175 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
44178 \begin_layout Section
44180 \begin_inset Index idx
44183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44190 \begin_inset Index idx
44193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44200 \begin_inset Index idx
44203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44204 Color ! Shaded boxes
44210 \begin_inset Index idx
44213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44214 Color ! Greyed-out notes
44222 \begin_layout Standard
44223 Here you can alter the font color for the
44227 (default: black), for
44230 \begin_inset space ~
44235 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
44239 (default: white) and for
44242 \begin_inset space ~
44252 sets the color back to the default.
44255 \begin_layout Standard
44256 Clicking any button showing
44264 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
44265 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
44266 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
44267 later more quickly.
44270 \begin_layout Standard
44271 Note, if you change the
44274 \begin_inset space ~
44279 font color and use the option
44282 \begin_inset space ~
44287 in the document settings under
44290 \begin_inset space ~
44295 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
44296 \begin_inset space ~
44300 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44302 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
44309 \begin_layout Standard
44310 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
44316 \begin_layout Standard
44320 \begin_inset space ~
44329 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
44332 \begin_inset space ~
44335 Code after a forced page break:
44338 \begin_layout Itemize
44339 For the page color:
44340 \begin_inset Newline newline
44347 pagecolor{color name}
44350 \begin_layout Itemize
44351 For the text color:
44352 \begin_inset Newline newline
44362 \begin_layout Standard
44363 You are restricted to one of
44399 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
44406 \begin_inset space ~
44412 \begin_inset Newline newline
44415 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
44416 names to refer to them:
44419 \begin_layout Itemize
44425 \begin_inset Newline newline
44430 page_backgroundcolor
44433 \begin_layout Itemize
44437 \begin_inset space ~
44443 \begin_inset Newline newline
44451 \begin_layout Itemize
44455 \begin_inset space ~
44461 \begin_inset Newline newline
44469 \begin_layout Itemize
44473 \begin_inset space ~
44479 \begin_inset Newline newline
44487 \begin_layout Standard
44488 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
44491 \begin_inset space ~
44499 \begin_inset space ~
44507 \begin_layout Section
44511 \begin_layout Standard
44512 Here you can adjust the
44516 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
44520 as described in section
44521 \begin_inset space ~
44525 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44527 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
44534 \begin_layout Section
44538 \begin_layout Standard
44539 Here you can specify if a specific citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44545 \begin_inset Index idx
44548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44550 packages ! biblatex
44560 \begin_inset Index idx
44563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44575 \begin_inset Index idx
44578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44586 If you use Bib\SpecialChar TeX
44589 Sectioned bibliography
44591 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44597 \begin_inset Index idx
44600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44602 packages ! bibtopic
44612 , you can select the style files and specify further options.
44613 Finally, you can select a document-specific
44617 for the generation of the bibliography.
44618 For a further description of these possibilities see section
44619 \begin_inset space ~
44623 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44625 reference "sec:Bibliography"
44632 \begin_layout Section
44636 \begin_layout Standard
44637 Here you can define the
44641 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
44643 \begin_inset space ~
44647 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44649 reference "sec:Index"
44656 \begin_layout Section
44660 \begin_layout Standard
44661 The PDF properties are explained in section
44662 \begin_inset space ~
44666 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44668 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
44675 \begin_layout Section
44679 \begin_layout Standard
44680 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
44681 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44687 \begin_inset Index idx
44690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44702 \begin_inset Index idx
44705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44717 \begin_inset Index idx
44720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44732 \begin_inset Index idx
44735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44747 \begin_inset Index idx
44750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44752 packages ! mathdots
44762 \begin_inset Index idx
44765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44767 packages ! mathtools
44777 \begin_inset Index idx
44780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44792 \begin_inset Index idx
44795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44797 packages ! stackrel
44807 \begin_inset Index idx
44810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44812 packages ! stmaryrd
44822 \begin_inset Index idx
44825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44827 packages ! undertilde
44832 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
44835 \begin_layout Description
44836 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
44837 -errors in formulas,
44838 ensure that you have this enabled.
44841 \begin_layout Description
44842 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
44843 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
44844 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
44848 \begin_layout Description
44849 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
44852 \begin_inset space ~
44864 \begin_layout Description
44865 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
44868 \begin_inset space ~
44880 \begin_layout Description
44881 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
44892 \begin_layout Description
44893 mathtools is used for the math commands
44929 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
44936 \begin_layout Description
44937 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
44939 Chemical Symbols and Equations
44948 \begin_layout Description
44949 stackrel is used for the math command
44966 \begin_layout Description
44967 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
44970 \begin_layout Description
44971 undertilde is used for the math command
44979 Accents for one Character
44988 \begin_layout Section
44992 \begin_layout Standard
44993 The float placement options are described in the section
44996 \begin_inset space ~
45004 \begin_inset space ~
45012 \begin_layout Section
45016 \begin_layout Standard
45017 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
45019 Program Code Listings
45024 \begin_inset space ~
45032 \begin_layout Section
45036 \begin_layout Standard
45037 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
45045 set to be used and set the
45050 The itemize environment is described in section
45051 \begin_inset space ~
45055 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45057 reference "sec:Itemize"
45064 \begin_layout Standard
45065 You can furthermore specify a
45068 \begin_inset space ~
45073 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45074 command of the desired character.
45075 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
45082 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
45084 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45088 \begin_inset space \space{}
45092 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
45102 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
45103 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
45106 \begin_layout Standard
45107 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
45110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45115 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
45116 -packages in the preamble (menu
45119 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45120 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
45123 \begin_inset space ~
45129 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
45133 usepackage{textcomp}
45136 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
45140 usepackage{amssymb}
45150 \begin_layout Section
45154 \begin_layout Standard
45155 Branches are described in section
45156 \begin_inset space ~
45160 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45162 reference "sec:Branches"
45169 \begin_layout Section
45171 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45173 name "sec:Doc-Formats"
45180 \begin_layout Standard
45181 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
45184 \begin_layout Description
45186 \begin_inset space ~
45190 \begin_inset space ~
45193 Format: The format that is used when you enter
45194 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45198 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45202 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45206 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45210 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45213 View Master Document
45214 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45218 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45221 Update Master Document
45222 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45229 menu or the toolbar.
45230 The default is set in
45232 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45233 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
45235 \begin_inset space ~
45238 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
45242 \begin_inset space ~
45246 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45248 reference "sec:File-Formats"
45255 \begin_layout Description
45257 \begin_inset space ~
45261 \begin_inset space ~
45264 Output settings for the menu
45266 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
45268 \begin_inset space ~
45274 For a detailed description see section
45276 Reverse DVI/PDF search
45281 \begin_inset space ~
45289 \begin_layout Description
45291 \begin_inset space ~
45295 \begin_inset space ~
45298 Options offers settings for the export format
45306 \begin_inset space ~
45311 will assure that the output follows exactly version
45312 \begin_inset space ~
45315 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
45319 \begin_inset space ~
45324 settings are described in detail in section
45326 Math Output in XHTML
45331 \begin_inset space ~
45340 \begin_inset space ~
45344 \begin_inset space ~
45349 is used for the size of equations in the output.
45352 \begin_layout Description
45354 \begin_inset space ~
45359 Save transient properties
45361 controls whether document settings that are frequently switched or that
45362 are specific to the user are saved with the document.
45363 The properties that are affected by option are currently:
45367 \begin_layout Itemize
45368 the activation of change tracking
45371 \begin_layout Itemize
45372 the output of tracked changes
45375 \begin_layout Itemize
45376 the recording of the document directory path.
45379 \begin_layout Standard
45380 Disabling the option can prevent issues in collaborative work and/or when
45381 using a version control system (for instance unnecessary merge conflicts).
45385 \begin_layout Section
45393 \begin_layout Standard
45394 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
45396 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
45398 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
45400 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
45404 \begin_layout Standard
45405 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45406 -syntax is given in section
45407 \begin_inset space ~
45411 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45413 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
45420 \begin_layout Chapter
45426 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45428 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
45433 \begin_inset Index idx
45436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45445 \begin_layout Standard
45446 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
45448 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45452 It has the following submenus.
45455 \begin_layout Section
45459 \begin_layout Subsection
45463 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45464 User Interface File
45465 \begin_inset Index idx
45468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45469 Customization ! of toolbars
45475 \begin_inset Index idx
45478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45479 Customization ! of menus
45487 \begin_layout Standard
45488 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
45489 interface (ui) file.
45490 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
45498 \begin_layout Description
45503 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
45506 \begin_layout Description
45513 the menu entries in popup context menus
45516 \begin_layout Description
45521 specifies the toolbar buttons
45524 \begin_layout Standard
45525 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
45526 and edit the entries.
45529 \begin_layout Standard
45530 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
45542 entries must be finished with an explicit
45567 and in the case of the
45568 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45572 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45580 The syntax for the entries is:
45583 \begin_layout Standard
45584 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45590 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45598 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45602 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45607 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45613 \begin_layout Standard
45615 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45618 All the \SpecialChar LyX
45619 -functions are listed in the menu
45621 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
45623 \begin_inset space ~
45631 \begin_layout Standard
45632 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
45638 \begin_layout Standard
45639 For example, assuming you use the menu
45641 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
45644 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
45648 \begin_layout Standard
45649 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45655 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45659 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45663 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45667 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45673 \begin_layout Standard
45675 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45679 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45683 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45690 to have the sixth bookmark.
45693 \begin_layout Standard
45697 \begin_inset space ~
45702 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
45703 's toolbar buttons.
45704 The currently available icon sets are compared in
45705 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45708 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
45716 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45720 \begin_layout Standard
45723 Enable tool tips in main work area
45725 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
45729 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45733 \begin_layout Standard
45738 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
45739 should display in the menu
45741 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
45743 \begin_inset space ~
45751 \begin_layout Subsection
45755 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45759 \begin_layout Standard
45762 Restore window layouts and geometries
45765 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
45766 the last \SpecialChar LyX
45770 \begin_layout Standard
45773 Restore cursor positions
45775 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
45779 \begin_layout Standard
45782 Load opened files from last session
45784 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
45788 \begin_layout Standard
45791 Clear all session information
45793 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
45794 sessions (cursor positions, names
45795 of last opened documents, etc.).
45798 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45800 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45802 name "subsec:Backup documents"
45807 \begin_inset Index idx
45810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45819 \begin_layout Standard
45822 Backup original documents when saving
45824 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
45825 it was saved the last time.
45826 It is stored in the
45829 \begin_inset space ~
45835 \begin_inset space ~
45839 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45841 reference "sec:Paths"
45845 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
45848 \begin_inset space ~
45854 The backup file has the file extension
45855 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45863 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45869 \begin_layout Standard
45872 Backup documents, every
45874 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
45877 \begin_layout Standard
45880 Save documents compressed by default
45882 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
45883 \begin_inset space ~
45887 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45889 reference "subsec:Compressed"
45894 This applies to newly created documents only.
45895 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
45898 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45899 Windows & work area
45902 \begin_layout Standard
45905 Open documents in tabs
45907 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
45911 \begin_layout Standard
45916 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
45921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45923 \begin_inset space ~
45927 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45929 reference "sec:Paths"
45933 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
45940 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
45941 documents will be opened in the same running instance
45942 of \SpecialChar LyX
45944 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
45945 instance is created for each file.
45948 \begin_layout Standard
45951 Single close-tab button
45953 is checked, there will only be one close button (
45963 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
45964 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
45965 Regardless of this option, one can always close a tab by middle-clicking
45969 \begin_layout Standard
45970 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
45973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45978 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
45979 before the change takes effect.
45987 \begin_layout Standard
45992 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
45994 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
45996 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
46000 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
46001 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
46002 and only want to close the view in once instance.
46005 \begin_layout Subsection
46007 \begin_inset Index idx
46010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46017 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46019 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
46026 \begin_layout Standard
46027 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
46031 \begin_layout Standard
46032 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
46035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46040 This section only deals with the fonts
46044 the \SpecialChar LyX
46046 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
46049 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46050 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
46061 \begin_layout Standard
46062 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
46079 (depends on the system) as its
46082 \begin_inset space ~
46098 \begin_layout Standard
46099 You can change the font size with the
46106 \begin_layout Standard
46111 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
46113 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46116 points have the size of 1
46117 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46121 \begin_inset space ~
46125 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46127 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
46132 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
46133 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46137 The sizes are explained in detail in section
46138 \begin_inset space ~
46142 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46144 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
46151 \begin_layout Standard
46154 Use pixmap cache to speed up font rendering
46156 enabled, \SpecialChar LyX
46157 needs to redraw the screen less often.
46158 This results in better performance, especially on slow systems.
46159 On the other hand, the characters might look more fuzzy on screen.
46160 So whether you enable this or not depends on whether you prefer speed over
46162 Note that the Pixmap Cache is only available and useful under Mac
46163 \begin_inset space ~
46169 \begin_layout Subsection
46171 \begin_inset Index idx
46174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46175 Color ! \SpecialChar LyX
46182 \begin_inset Index idx
46185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46194 \begin_layout Standard
46195 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
46196 by choosing an item in the
46197 list and selecting the
46204 \begin_layout Standard
46205 By checking the option
46209 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
46212 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
46213 \begin_inset space ~
46217 \begin_inset space ~
46222 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
46225 \begin_layout Subsection
46227 \begin_inset Index idx
46230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46239 \begin_layout Standard
46240 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
46244 \begin_layout Standard
46249 enables previewing snippets of your document.
46250 This feature is described in section
46251 \begin_inset space ~
46255 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46257 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
46264 \begin_layout Standard
46265 Checking the option
46268 \begin_inset space ~
46272 \begin_inset space ~
46276 \begin_inset space ~
46281 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
46284 \begin_layout Section
46286 \begin_inset Index idx
46289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46298 \begin_layout Subsection
46302 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46306 \begin_layout Standard
46309 Cursor follows scrollbar
46311 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
46315 \begin_layout Standard
46316 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
46317 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
46318 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
46321 \begin_layout Standard
46324 Scroll below end of document
46326 is self-explanatory.
46329 \begin_layout Standard
46330 In \SpecialChar LyX
46331 one can jump from word to word by pressing
46338 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
46340 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
46341 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
46344 \begin_layout Standard
46347 Sort environments alphabetically
46349 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
46352 \begin_layout Standard
46355 Group environments by their category
46357 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
46360 \begin_layout Standard
46365 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
46376 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46380 \begin_layout Standard
46381 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
46386 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
46387 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
46391 \begin_layout Subsection
46393 \begin_inset Index idx
46396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46403 \begin_inset Index idx
46406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46407 Settings ! Shortcuts
46415 \begin_layout Standard
46420 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
46422 Several binding files are available, among them:
46425 \begin_layout Description
46426 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
46429 \begin_layout Description
46430 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
46442 \begin_layout Description
46443 mac.bind a set of bindings for
46446 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46454 \begin_layout Standard
46455 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
46460 , and binding files for special languages.
46461 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
46462 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46466 \begin_inset space \space{}
46470 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46474 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46478 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
46479 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
46480 will try to use the appropriate binding
46484 \begin_layout Standard
46485 Some binding files, like
46489 , only have a limited scope.
46490 When looking at the end of the file
46494 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
46497 \begin_layout Standard
46501 \begin_inset space ~
46505 \begin_inset space ~
46510 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
46511 in the selected key binding file.
46514 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46516 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46518 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
46523 \begin_inset Index idx
46526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46527 Key Bindings ! Editing
46535 \begin_layout Standard
46536 To add new or modify existing key bindings to your own taste you can use
46537 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
46538 functions and the bound shortcuts.
46539 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
46542 Show key-bindings containing
46545 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
46546 Insert there for example as keyword
46547 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46551 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46554 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
46555 functions that contain
46556 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46560 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46564 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
46565 All \SpecialChar LyX
46566 functions are also listed in the file
46571 that you will find in the
46578 \begin_layout Standard
46579 For example, to add the shortcut
46587 , select the function and press the
46592 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
46593 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
46596 \begin_layout Standard
46597 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
46598 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
46600 definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the different
46601 function names as a semicolon separated list.
46603 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
46608 \begin_layout Standard
46609 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
46612 \begin_layout Standard
46613 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
46615 The syntax of the entries is:
46618 \begin_layout Standard
46624 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46628 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46632 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46637 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46643 \begin_layout Standard
46644 Note, though, that the key combination definition uses a specific syntax.
46645 This applies to the designators of specific modifier keys (e.
46646 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46673 , respectively) as well as to the other keys.
46674 Note particularly that you cannot use non-alphanumeric characters directly
46675 in the definition of the key combination, but must use commands following
46676 the Xlib standard instead (please refer to the existing bind files for
46678 So if you wanted to bind a command to the key combination
46682 , you needed to specify it as
46687 If you use the dialog to edit key bindings, you don't have to care for
46690 transforms your input to the correct syntax.
46693 \begin_layout Subsection
46695 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46697 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
46702 \begin_inset Index idx
46705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46712 \begin_inset Index idx
46715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46716 Settings ! Keyboard Map
46724 \begin_layout Standard
46725 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
46726 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
46727 provides keyboard maps.
46728 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
46729 is a Romanian one, you can enable
46732 \begin_inset space ~
46736 \begin_inset space ~
46741 and select the keyboard map file named
46748 \begin_layout Standard
46757 keyboard map and, if you use the
46761 bindings, you can select the first and second with
46764 arg "keymap-primary"
46770 arg "keymap-secondary"
46773 respectively or toggle between them with
46776 arg "keymap-toggle"
46782 \begin_layout Standard
46783 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
46786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46791 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
46800 \begin_layout Standard
46801 You can also specify the mouse
46803 Wheel scrolling speed
46806 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
46810 Middle mouse button pasting
46812 you can determine if pressing the middle mouse button (or the mouse wheel)
46813 inserts the content of the clipboard.
46816 \begin_layout Standard
46824 \begin_inset space ~
46828 \begin_inset space ~
46833 you can select a key for zooming.
46834 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
46837 \begin_layout Subsection
46841 \begin_layout Standard
46842 Input completion is described in section
46843 \begin_inset space ~
46847 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46849 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
46856 \begin_layout Section
46858 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46865 \begin_inset Index idx
46868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46875 \begin_inset Index idx
46878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46887 \begin_layout Standard
46888 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
46889 are normally determined during
46891 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
46894 \begin_layout Description
46896 \begin_inset space ~
46899 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
46900 's working directory.
46901 It is the default when you
46912 \begin_inset space ~
46920 \begin_layout Description
46922 \begin_inset space ~
46925 templates This directory will be opened when you use the menu
46927 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
46929 \begin_inset space ~
46933 \begin_inset space ~
46941 \begin_layout Description
46943 \begin_inset space ~
46946 files This directory will be opened when you use the button
46952 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
46956 \begin_inset Newline newline
46960 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
46963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46972 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
46973 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
46981 \begin_layout Description
46983 \begin_inset space ~
46987 \begin_inset Index idx
46990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46996 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
46997 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
46998 \begin_inset space ~
47002 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47004 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
47012 will be used to save the backups.
47013 \begin_inset Newline newline
47016 Backup files have the ending
47017 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47021 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47027 \begin_layout Description
47029 \begin_inset space ~
47032 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
47033 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
47035 \begin_inset Newline newline
47042 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
47048 You can edit this file with the program
47057 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
47058 in its preferences under
47061 \begin_inset space ~
47067 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
47072 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
47074 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
47075 in your \SpecialChar LyX
47081 and \SpecialChar LyX
47082 need to be running the same time.
47083 \begin_inset Newline newline
47086 The pipe is also used for the
47090 feature, see section
47091 \begin_inset space ~
47095 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47097 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
47102 \begin_inset Newline newline
47105 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
47106 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
47107 \begin_inset Newline newline
47123 \begin_layout Description
47125 \begin_inset space ~
47128 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
47131 \begin_layout Description
47133 \begin_inset space ~
47136 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
47137 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
47138 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
47141 \begin_layout Description
47143 \begin_inset space ~
47146 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
47152 You only need to specify it if you are using
47156 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
47158 For \SpecialChar LyX
47163 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
47167 \begin_layout Description
47169 \begin_inset space ~
47172 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
47173 When \SpecialChar LyX
47174 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
47175 to find it on the system.
47176 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
47178 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
47180 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47184 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47187 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
47188 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
47191 \begin_layout Description
47193 \begin_inset space ~
47196 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
47197 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
47198 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
47199 code or in the document
47201 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
47203 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
47204 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
47205 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
47206 scanned for the input files.
47207 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
47208 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
47210 It is recommended that you always include '.' as one of the paths; otherwise
47211 compilation may fail for some documents.
47214 \begin_layout Section
47218 \begin_layout Standard
47219 Here you can insert your
47228 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
47230 \begin_inset space ~
47234 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47236 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
47240 , to mark changes you make as yours.
47243 \begin_layout Section
47245 \begin_inset Index idx
47248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47249 Language ! Settings
47255 \begin_inset Index idx
47258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47259 Settings ! Language
47267 \begin_layout Subsection
47269 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47271 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
47278 \begin_layout Description
47280 \begin_inset space ~
47284 \begin_inset space ~
47287 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
47289 You can find its actual translation status here:
47290 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47292 target "https://www.lyx.org/I18n"
47300 \begin_layout Description
47302 \begin_inset space ~
47305 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
47306 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
47307 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
47308 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
47309 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47313 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47317 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47321 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47325 The most widespread language package is
47330 \begin_inset Index idx
47333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47340 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
47342 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
47343 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
47344 come with the alternative
47350 \begin_inset Index idx
47353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47355 packages ! polyglossia
47360 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
47361 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
47367 The available selections are described in section
47368 \begin_inset space ~
47372 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47374 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
47381 \begin_layout Description
47383 \begin_inset space ~
47386 start If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
47387 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
47388 you can here specify the command to start the package.
47389 An example is the start command
47395 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
47397 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
47401 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
47417 selectlanguage{$$lang}
47422 \begin_layout Description
47424 \begin_inset space ~
47432 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
47433 command toggles the package on and off.
47436 \begin_layout Description
47438 \begin_inset space ~
47442 \begin_inset space ~
47445 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
47449 \begin_layout Description
47451 \begin_inset space ~
47455 \begin_inset space ~
47458 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
47462 \begin_layout Description
47464 \begin_inset space ~
47468 \begin_inset space ~
47471 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
47472 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
47473 used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
47475 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
47482 \begin_layout Description
47484 \begin_inset space ~
47487 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
47489 When this option is not set, the
47492 \begin_inset space ~
47497 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47499 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
47502 \begin_inset space ~
47510 \begin_layout Description
47512 \begin_inset space ~
47518 \begin_inset space ~
47524 When it is not set, the
47527 \begin_inset space ~
47532 is set to the end of the document.
47535 \begin_layout Description
47537 \begin_inset space ~
47541 \begin_inset space ~
47544 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
47545 language will be underlined in blue.
47548 \begin_layout Description
47550 \begin_inset space ~
47554 \begin_inset space ~
47557 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
47558 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
47561 \begin_layout Description
47563 \begin_inset space ~
47566 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
47567 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
47568 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
47569 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
47572 \begin_layout Subsection
47576 \begin_layout Standard
47577 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
47578 \begin_inset space ~
47582 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47584 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
47591 \begin_layout Section
47595 \begin_layout Subsection
47597 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47599 name "subsec:General-output"
47606 \begin_layout Description
47608 \begin_inset space ~
47611 search Commands that will be used for the menu
47613 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
47615 \begin_inset space ~
47621 For a detailed description see section
47623 Reverse DVI/PDF search
47628 \begin_inset space ~
47636 \begin_layout Description
47638 \begin_inset space ~
47641 Options Options for the program
47645 that is used for the export format
47650 \begin_inset space ~
47654 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47656 reference "subsec:Export"
47661 Possible options are listed in the
47666 \begin_inset Newline newline
47670 \begin_inset Flex URL
47673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47675 https://www.tug.org/texinfohtml/dvips.html
47685 \begin_layout Description
47687 \begin_inset space ~
47691 \begin_inset space ~
47694 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
47697 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
47698 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
47700 \begin_inset space ~
47706 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
47709 \begin_layout Description
47711 \begin_inset space ~
47715 \begin_inset Index idx
47718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47725 \begin_inset Index idx
47728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47729 Settings ! Date format
47734 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
47735 \begin_inset Newline newline
47739 \begin_inset Flex URL
47742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47744 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
47750 \begin_inset Newline newline
47753 For example the format
47754 \begin_inset Newline newline
47758 \begin_inset Newline newline
47761 prints the date as day/month/year.
47764 \begin_layout Description
47766 \begin_inset space ~
47770 \begin_inset space ~
47773 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
47774 is allowed to overwrite on export.
47777 \begin_layout Subsection
47783 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47785 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
47790 \begin_inset Index idx
47793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47794 Settings ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
47803 \begin_layout Description
47805 \begin_inset space ~
47813 \begin_inset space ~
47817 \begin_inset space ~
47820 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
47825 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
47846 are used for Cyrillic.
47847 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
47848 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47856 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47860 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
47862 sets up in the background.
47863 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
47866 \begin_layout Description
47868 \begin_inset space ~
47872 \begin_inset space ~
47876 \begin_inset space ~
47880 \begin_inset space ~
47883 options They only have an effect when the program
47887 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
47890 \begin_layout Standard
47891 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
47892 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
47893 manuals of the applications.
47896 \begin_layout Description
47898 \begin_inset space ~
47901 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
47902 \begin_inset space ~
47906 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47908 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
47915 \begin_layout Description
47917 \begin_inset space ~
47920 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
47921 \begin_inset space ~
47925 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47927 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
47934 \begin_layout Description
47936 \begin_inset space ~
47939 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
47940 \begin_inset space ~
47944 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47946 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
47953 \begin_layout Description
47959 \begin_inset space ~
47962 command Command for the program
47964 Check\SpecialChar TeX
47967 that is described in the section
47969 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
47974 Additional Features
47979 \begin_layout Standard
47980 There are additionally the following options:
47983 \begin_layout Description
47985 \begin_inset space ~
47989 \begin_inset space ~
47993 \begin_inset space ~
47997 \begin_inset space ~
48002 \begin_inset space ~
48005 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
48006 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48012 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48016 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48020 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48023 to separate folders.
48024 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
48026 \begin_inset Index idx
48029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48036 \begin_inset Index idx
48039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48048 \begin_layout Description
48050 \begin_inset space ~
48054 \begin_inset space ~
48058 \begin_inset space ~
48062 \begin_inset space ~
48066 \begin_inset space ~
48070 \begin_inset space ~
48073 changes Removes all manually set
48079 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
48080 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
48082 \begin_inset space ~
48087 dialog when changing the document class.
48090 \begin_layout Section
48092 \begin_inset space ~
48096 \begin_inset Index idx
48099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48108 \begin_layout Subsection
48110 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48112 name "subsec:Converters"
48117 \begin_inset Index idx
48120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48129 \begin_layout Standard
48130 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
48131 from one format to another.
48132 You can modify converters or create new ones.
48133 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
48140 \begin_inset space ~
48145 field and press the
48150 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
48154 \begin_inset space ~
48159 drop-down list, modify the
48163 field and press the
48170 \begin_layout Standard
48173 Converter File Cache
48179 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
48181 Maximum Age (in days
48184 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
48185 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
48188 \begin_layout Standard
48189 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
48190 definition, is described in the section
48201 \begin_layout Subsection
48203 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48205 name "sec:File-Formats"
48210 \begin_inset Index idx
48213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48220 \begin_inset Index idx
48223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48232 \begin_layout Standard
48233 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
48243 programs that should be used for certain formats.
48246 \begin_layout Standard
48247 You can also define the
48249 Default output format
48251 that is used when you use
48253 View, Update, View Master Document
48257 Update Master Document
48263 menu or the toolbar.
48266 \begin_layout Standard
48267 More about formats and their options is described in the section
48278 \begin_layout Standard
48279 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
48281 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
48282 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
48283 This is done by specifying a
48288 More about this is described in the section
48299 \begin_layout Chapter
48300 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
48302 \begin_inset Index idx
48305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48312 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48314 name "chap:Units-available-in"
48321 \begin_layout Standard
48323 \begin_inset space ~
48327 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48329 reference "tab:Units"
48333 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
48334 and used in this documentation.
48337 \begin_layout Standard
48338 \begin_inset Float table
48344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48345 \begin_inset Caption Standard
48347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48348 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48363 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
48369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48371 \begin_inset Tabular
48372 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="21" columns="3">
48373 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
48374 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
48375 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle" width="50col%">
48376 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
48378 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48387 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48396 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48408 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48417 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48422 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48426 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48434 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48445 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48454 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48459 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48463 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48471 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48482 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48491 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48500 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48511 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48520 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48525 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48529 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
48533 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48541 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48552 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48561 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48574 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48585 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48594 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48607 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48618 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48627 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48636 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48647 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48656 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48665 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48676 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48685 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48690 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48694 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48702 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48713 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48722 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48727 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48731 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48739 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48750 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48759 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48764 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48768 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48776 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48787 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48796 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48800 scaled point (65536
48801 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48805 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48813 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48824 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48833 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48842 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48855 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48864 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48868 % of height between baselines of two subsequent text lines
48873 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48886 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48895 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48904 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48917 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48926 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48935 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48948 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48957 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48966 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48979 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48988 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48992 % of original image width
48997 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49008 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49017 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49026 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49039 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49048 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49057 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49081 \begin_layout Standard
49082 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
49085 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
49092 \begin_layout Bibliography
49093 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49094 LatexCommand bibitem
49101 The \SpecialChar LyX
49103 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49106 target "https://www.lyx.org/Credits"
49112 \begin_inset Newline newline
49116 \begin_inset Flex URL
49119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49121 https://www.lyx.org/Credits
49129 \begin_layout Bibliography
49130 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49131 LatexCommand bibitem
49132 key "latexcompanion"
49137 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
49139 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
49140 Companion Second Edition.
49143 Addison-Wesley, 2004
49146 \begin_layout Bibliography
49147 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49148 LatexCommand bibitem
49154 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
49157 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
49161 Addison-Wesley, 2003
49164 \begin_layout Bibliography
49165 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49166 LatexCommand bibitem
49175 : A Document Preparation System.
49178 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
49181 \begin_layout Bibliography
49182 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49183 LatexCommand bibitem
49193 The \SpecialChar TeX
49197 Addison-Wesley, 1984
49200 \begin_layout Bibliography
49201 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49202 LatexCommand bibitem
49208 The \SpecialChar TeX
49210 \begin_inset Newline newline
49214 \begin_inset Flex URL
49217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49219 http://texcatalogue.ctan.org/bytopic.html
49227 \begin_layout Bibliography
49228 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49229 LatexCommand bibitem
49235 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
49237 \begin_inset Newline newline
49241 \begin_inset Flex URL
49244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49246 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
49254 \begin_layout Bibliography
49255 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49256 LatexCommand bibitem
49263 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49265 name "Documentation"
49266 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
49273 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
49277 \begin_inset Newline newline
49281 \begin_inset Flex URL
49284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49286 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
49294 \begin_layout Bibliography
49295 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49296 LatexCommand bibitem
49303 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49305 name "Documentation"
49306 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
49311 how to use the program
49313 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
49317 \begin_inset Newline newline
49321 \begin_inset Flex URL
49324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49326 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
49334 \begin_layout Bibliography
49335 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49336 LatexCommand bibitem
49343 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49345 name "Documentation"
49346 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf"
49351 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49357 \begin_inset Index idx
49360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49362 packages ! biblatex
49368 \begin_inset Newline newline
49372 \begin_inset Flex URL
49375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49377 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf
49385 \begin_layout Bibliography
49386 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49387 LatexCommand bibitem
49394 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49396 name "Documentation"
49397 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf"
49402 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49408 \begin_inset Index idx
49411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49419 \begin_inset Newline newline
49423 \begin_inset Flex URL
49426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49428 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf
49436 \begin_layout Bibliography
49437 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49438 LatexCommand bibitem
49445 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49447 name "Documentation"
49448 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
49458 \begin_inset Newline newline
49462 \begin_inset Flex URL
49465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49467 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
49475 \begin_layout Bibliography
49476 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49477 LatexCommand bibitem
49478 key "makeindex-man"
49484 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49487 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
49497 \begin_inset Newline newline
49501 \begin_inset Flex URL
49504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49506 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
49514 \begin_layout Bibliography
49515 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49516 LatexCommand bibitem
49523 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49525 name "Documentation"
49526 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
49536 \begin_inset Newline newline
49540 \begin_inset Flex URL
49543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49545 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
49553 \begin_layout Bibliography
49554 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49555 LatexCommand bibitem
49562 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49564 name "Documentation"
49565 target "https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
49570 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
49572 \begin_inset Newline newline
49576 \begin_inset Flex URL
49579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49581 https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
49589 \begin_layout Bibliography
49590 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49591 LatexCommand bibitem
49598 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49600 name "Documentation"
49601 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
49606 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49612 \begin_inset Index idx
49615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49623 \begin_inset Newline newline
49627 \begin_inset Flex URL
49630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49632 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
49640 \begin_layout Bibliography
49641 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49642 LatexCommand bibitem
49649 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49651 name "Documentation"
49652 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
49657 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49663 \begin_inset Index idx
49666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49668 packages ! enumitem
49674 \begin_inset Newline newline
49678 \begin_inset Flex URL
49681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49683 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
49691 \begin_layout Bibliography
49692 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49693 LatexCommand bibitem
49700 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49702 name "Documentation"
49703 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
49708 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49714 \begin_inset Index idx
49717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49719 packages ! fancyhdr
49725 \begin_inset Newline newline
49729 \begin_inset Flex URL
49732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49734 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
49742 \begin_layout Bibliography
49743 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49744 LatexCommand bibitem
49751 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49753 name "Documentation"
49754 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf"
49759 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49765 \begin_inset Index idx
49768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49770 packages ! hyperref
49776 \begin_inset Newline newline
49780 \begin_inset Flex URL
49783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49785 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf
49793 \begin_layout Bibliography
49794 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49795 LatexCommand bibitem
49802 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49804 name "Documentation"
49805 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf"
49810 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49816 \begin_inset Index idx
49819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49821 packages ! microtpye
49827 \begin_inset Newline newline
49831 \begin_inset Flex URL
49834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49836 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf
49844 \begin_layout Bibliography
49845 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49846 LatexCommand bibitem
49853 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49855 name "Documentation"
49856 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
49861 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49867 \begin_inset Index idx
49870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49878 \begin_inset Newline newline
49882 \begin_inset Flex URL
49885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49887 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
49895 \begin_layout Bibliography
49896 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49897 LatexCommand bibitem
49904 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49906 name "Documentation"
49907 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
49912 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49918 \begin_inset Index idx
49921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49923 packages ! prettyref
49929 \begin_inset Newline newline
49933 \begin_inset Flex URL
49936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49938 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
49946 \begin_layout Bibliography
49947 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49948 LatexCommand bibitem
49955 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49957 name "Documentation"
49958 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
49963 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49969 \begin_inset Index idx
49972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49974 packages ! refstyle
49980 \begin_inset Newline newline
49984 \begin_inset Flex URL
49987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49989 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
49997 \begin_layout Bibliography
49998 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49999 LatexCommand bibitem
50006 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50009 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
50014 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50016 \begin_inset Newline newline
50020 \begin_inset Flex URL
50023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50025 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
50033 \begin_layout Bibliography
50034 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50035 LatexCommand bibitem
50042 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50045 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
50050 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50052 \begin_inset Newline newline
50056 \begin_inset Flex URL
50059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50061 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
50069 \begin_layout Bibliography
50070 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50071 LatexCommand bibitem
50078 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50081 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
50086 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50087 for Cyrillic languages:
50088 \begin_inset Newline newline
50092 \begin_inset Flex URL
50095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50097 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
50105 \begin_layout Bibliography
50106 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50107 LatexCommand bibitem
50114 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50117 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
50122 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50124 \begin_inset Newline newline
50128 \begin_inset Flex URL
50131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50133 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
50141 \begin_layout Bibliography
50142 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50143 LatexCommand bibitem
50150 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50153 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
50158 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50160 \begin_inset Newline newline
50164 \begin_inset Flex URL
50167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50169 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
50177 \begin_layout Bibliography
50178 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50179 LatexCommand bibitem
50186 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50189 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
50194 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50196 \begin_inset Newline newline
50200 \begin_inset Flex URL
50203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50205 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
50213 \begin_layout Standard
50214 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
50221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50248 \begin_inset Note Note
50251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50258 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
50259 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
50260 bibliography is the second one:
50268 \begin_layout Standard
50269 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
50270 LatexCommand bibtex
50271 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
50272 options "biblio/alphadin"
50279 \begin_layout Standard
50280 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
50284 \begin_layout Standard
50288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50294 pagedeclaration}[1]{
50297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50303 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
50311 \begin_inset Note Note
50314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50315 This command makes the page number a clickable hyperlink, see sec.
50316 \begin_inset space ~
50320 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50322 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
50334 \begin_layout Standard
50335 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
50336 LatexCommand printnomenclature
50342 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
50343 LatexCommand printindex